Broadgate Bg-20 Iomm A05 v14 en

BroadGate BG-20
Version 14
Installation, Operation, and

Maintenance Manual
426006-2332-013-A04
BG-20 Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual

V14
Catalog No: X39458
June 2012
6th Edition
Copyright by ECI Telecom, 2002-2012. All rights reserved worldwide.

This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and ECI Telecom Ltd. (ECI Telecom). BY OPENING THE
DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS
AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE
UNOPENED DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE AND THE ACCOMPANYING ITEMS (INCLUDING
WRITTEN MATERIALS AND BINDERS OR OTHER CONTAINERS), TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH YOU
OBTAINED THEM.
The information contained in the documentation and/or disk is proprietary and is subject to all relevant copyright,
patent, and other laws protecting intellectual property, as well as any specific agreement protecting ECI Telecom's
rights in the aforesaid information. Neither this document nor the information contained in the documentation and/or
disk may be published, reproduced, or disclosed to third parties, in whole or in part, without the express prior
written permission of ECI Telecom. In addition, any use of this document, the documentation and/or the disk, or the
information contained therein for any purposes other than those for which it was disclosed, is strictly forbidden.
ECI Telecom reserves the right, without prior notice or liability, to make changes in equipment design or
specifications. Information supplied by ECI Telecom is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no
responsibility whatsoever is assumed by ECI Telecom for the use thereof, nor for the rights of third parties, which
may be affected in any way by the use and/or dissemination thereof.
Any representation(s) in the documentation and/or disk concerning performance of ECI Telecom product(s) are for
informational purposes only and are not warranties of product performance or otherwise, either express or implied.
ECI Telecom's standard limited warranty, stated in its sales contract or order confirmation form, is the only warranty
offered by ECI Telecom.
The documentation and/or disk is provided AS IS and may contain flaws, omissions, or typesetting errors. No
warranty is granted nor liability assumed in relation thereto, unless specifically undertaken in ECI Telecom's sales
contract or order confirmation. Information contained in the documentation and in the disk is periodically updated,
and changes will be incorporated in subsequent editions. If you have encountered an error, please notify ECI
Telecom. All specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
The documentation and/or disk and all information contained therein is owned by ECI Telecom and is protected by
all relevant copyright, patent, and other applicable laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must
treat the information contained in the documentation and disk as any other copyrighted material (for example, a
book or musical recording).
Other Restrictions. You may not rent, lease, sell, or otherwise dispose of the documentation and disk, as
applicable. YOU MAY NOT USE, COPY, MODIFY, OR TRANSFER THE DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK OR
ANY COPY IN WHOLE OR PART, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE. ALL RIGHTS NOT
EXPRESSLY GRANTED ARE RESERVED BY ECI Telecom.
All trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective holders.
ECI Telecom shall not be liable to you or to any other party for any loss or damage whatsoever or howsoever
caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with this documentation and/or disk, the information contained
therein, its use, or otherwise. Notwithstanding the generality of the aforementioned, you expressly waive any claim
and/or demand regarding liability for indirect, special, incidental, or consequential loss or damage which may arise
in respect of the documentation and/or disk and/or the information contained therein, howsoever caused, even if
advised of the possibility of such damages.
The end user hereby undertakes and acknowledges that they read the "Before You Start/Safety Guidelines"
instructions and that such instructions were understood by them.
It is hereby clarified that ECI Telecom shall not be liable to you or to any other party for any loss or damage
whatsoever or howsoever caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with you fulfilling and/or failed to fulfill
in whole or in part the "Before You Start/Safety Guidelines" instructions.
Contents
About This Manual .................................................................. xiii
Overview ........................................................................................................... xiii
Intended Audience ............................................................................................ xiii
Document Organization ..................................................................................... xiii
Document Conventions ..................................................................................... xiv
Related Documentation ...................................................................................... xv
Obtaining Technical Documentation .................................................................. xv
Technical Assistance......................................................................................... xvi
Introduction.............................................................................. 1-1
BG-20 Platform Overview ................................................................................. 1-1
BG-20 Platform Options ................................................................................... 1-2
Before You Start ...................................................................... 2-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 2-1
Outline of the Installation Procedure ................................................................ 2-2
Site Preparation................................................................................................ 2-5
Tools and Test Equipment ............................................................................... 2-7
Installation of BG-20 in Racks .......................................................................... 2-7
Preparing Cables and Fibers .......................................................................... 2-10
Work and Equipment Safety ........................................................................... 2-17
Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge .................................................... 2-23
Equipment Installation ............................................................ 3-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 3-1
Preliminary Preparations .................................................................................. 3-2
Installation Sequence ....................................................................................... 3-2
Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection................................................... 3-5
Installation Options ........................................................................................... 3-6
Installing Ancillary Units in Racks ..................................................................... 3-8
Installing the BG-20B Shelf in the Rack ......................................................... 3-31
Installing the BG-20E Shelf in the Rack ......................................................... 3-37
Installing the BG-20EH Platform in the Rack ................................................. 3-45
Installing the BG-20C Shelf in Racks ............................................................. 3-53
Connecting Fibers and Cables to the BG-20 Shelf ........................................ 3-66
426006-2332-013-A04
ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary
Contents
BG-20 Installation, Operation, and

Maintenance Manual
BG-20B Wall-Mounted Installations ....................................... 4-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 4-1
Wall-Mounted Cabinet ...................................................................................... 4-2
Installing the BG-20B in a Wall-Mounted Cabinet ............................................ 4-3
Installing the Interior Components .................................................................... 4-4
Installing Cabling Accessories ........................................................................ 4-10
DDF 21 E1s Unit ............................................................................................ 4-14
Installing the BG-20B and Three DDFs .......................................................... 4-18
Installing the BG-20B, Two DDFs, and an AC CONV Unit ............................. 4-21
Connecting Cabinet Grounding ...................................................................... 4-24
Routing and Connecting Cables and Fibers in the Cabinet ........................... 4-24
Connecting Fibers and Cables to the BG-20B in Wall-Mounted Cabinet ....... 4-32
Installing the Wall-Mounted Cabinet Covers and Door .................................. 4-33
Wall-Mounted Frame ...................................................................................... 4-37
Installing the Wall-Mounted Frame ................................................................. 4-37
Installing the BG-20B and Accessories in the Wall-Mounted Frame .............. 4-41
Installing the Wall-Mounted Frame Front Cover ............................................. 4-46
Connecting Wall-Mounted Frame Grounding ................................................. 4-48
Routing and Connecting Cables and Fibers in the Frame ............................. 4-49
Commissioning Tests ............................................................. 5-1

Test Equipment ................................................................................................ 5-1
Site Commissioning Tests ................................................................................ 5-2
SDH Commissioning Tests .............................................................................. 5-5
Data Network Commissioning Tests .............................................................. 5-11
Maintenance ............................................................................. 6-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 6-1
Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials .............................................................. 6-1
Preventive Maintenance ................................................................................... 6-2
Onsite Troubleshooting .................................................................................... 6-3
Troubleshooting Power Problems .................................................................... 6-4
Troubleshooting Using Component Indicators ................................................. 6-5
Replacing Cards and Modules ....................................................................... 6-24
Connection Data ..................................................................... A-1
Overview .......................................................................................................... A-2

INF_20B/INF_20E DC Input Power Connectors .............................................. A-2
AC_CONV_20B/AC_CONV_20E AC Input Power Connectors ....................... A-2
MNG Ethernet Connector ................................................................................. A-3
T3/T4 Timing Connector................................................................................... A-4
RS-232 Connector............................................................................................ A-5
Orderwire Connector ........................................................................................ A-6
V.11 Overhead Connector ................................................................................ A-7
Alarms Connector............................................................................................. A-8
E1 Connectors on MXC20 (L91 Cable) ............................................................ A-9
ii
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Contents
E1 Connectors on MXC20 (L115 Cable) ........................................................ A-14

E1 Connectors on ME1_21 and ME1_42 ....................................................... A-19
Fast Ethernet Interface Connectors ............................................................... A-24
M345_3 Card Connection Data ...................................................................... A-24
MGE_1_L1 Card Connection Data ................................................................. A-24
P345_3E Card Connection Data .................................................................... A-25
PE1_63 Card Connection Data ...................................................................... A-25
ESW_2G_8F_E Card Connection Data ......................................................... A-26
MPS_2G_8F Card Connection Data .............................................................. A-26
SM_10E Card Connection Data ..................................................................... A-26
ICP_VF Connection Data ............................................................................... A-39
ICP_V24 Connection Data ............................................................................. A-40
ICP_V35 Connection Data ............................................................................. A-43
ICP_V11_V24 Connection Data ..................................................................... A-44
ICP_DB37D Connection Data ........................................................................ A-46
RAP-4B Connectors ....................................................................................... A-50
Rack Installation ..................................................................... B-1
Installing Equipment Racks .............................................................................. B-1

Installing 19" Racks .......................................................................................... B-6
License Activation .................................................................. C-1
BG-20 Licensing Scheme................................................................................. C-1

Selecting the Proper BG-20 for Each Site ........................................................ C-3
Activating Licenses........................................................................................... C-4
Index .......................................................................................... I-1
426006-2332-013-A04
iii
Contents
iv

Maintenance Manual
426006-2332-013-A04
List of Figures
Figure 1-1: Typical BG-20 shelf ..................................................................................... 1-2
Figure 1-2: BG-20C shelf ............................................................................................... 1-2
Figure 2-1: Typical installation of four BG-20 shelves ................................................... 2-9
Figure 2-2: Laser warning label.................................................................................... 2-20
Figure 2-3: Basic ESD warning symbol ....................................................................... 2-23
Figure 3-1: Typical installation of a single BG-20B shelf in a 2200 ETSI rack .............. 3-3
Figure 3-2: Typical installation of four BG-20 shelves ................................................... 3-7
Figure 3-3: Location of RAP-BG grounding stud ......................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-4: Identification of RAP-BG cable routes ....................................................... 3-11
Figure 3-5: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-BG ........................................... 3-11
Figure 3-6: RAP-BG platform power cable grounding screws ..................................... 3-13
Figure 3-7: RAP-BG front cover removal ..................................................................... 3-14
Figure 3-8: RAP-BG circuit breaker installation ........................................................... 3-14
Figure 3-9: Platform DC input power connector pin functions ..................................... 3-15
Figure 3-10: Locating RAP-4B grounding stud ............................................................ 3-17
Figure 3-11: RAP-4B with grounding cable.................................................................. 3-18
Figure 3-12: Identifying RAP-4B cable routes.............................................................. 3-18
Figure 3-13: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-4B .......................................... 3-19
Figure 3-14: RAP-4B platform power cable grounding screws .................................... 3-20
Figure 3-15: RAP-4B front cover removal .................................................................... 3-21
Figure 3-16: RAP-4B circuit breaker installation .......................................................... 3-21
Figure 3-17: Platform DC input power connector pin functions ................................... 3-22
Figure 3-18: Threading optical fibers in the FST.......................................................... 3-23
Figure 3-19: Attaching rack mounting brackets to the ODF......................................... 3-24
Figure 3-20: ODF front panel ....................................................................................... 3-25
Figure 3-21: ODF open view ........................................................................................ 3-25
Figure 3-22: ODF fiber routes ...................................................................................... 3-26
Figure 3-23: Installing ICP_MCP30 in the rack ............................................................ 3-28
Figure 3-24: Installing SM_10E ICPs in the rack ......................................................... 3-29
Figure 3-25: Installing the AC_CONV_UNIT in the rack .............................................. 3-30
Figure 3-26: Installing the rail stiffeners in the rack ..................................................... 3-32
Figure 3-27: Installing a power module in the BG-20B ................................................ 3-33
Figure 3-28: Installing a Dslot module in the BG-20B .................................................. 3-34
Figure 3-29: Installing an SFP module in the BG-20B ................................................. 3-36
Figure 3-30: Installing the BG-20E on the BG-20B ...................................................... 3-38
Figure 3-31: Removing the BG-20E from the BG-20B ................................................ 3-39
426006-2332-013-A04
List of Figures

Maintenance Manual
Figure 3-32: Inserting the thin flat-head tool ................................................................ 3-40

Figure 3-33: Raising the rivet cap ................................................................................ 3-40
Figure 3-34: Removing the rivet ................................................................................... 3-40
Figure 3-35: Installing the power module in the BG-20E ............................................. 3-41
Figure 3-36: Installing an extension card in the BG-20E ............................................. 3-42
Figure 3-37: Installing a traffic module on the SM_10E ............................................... 3-44
Figure 3-38: Installing the BG-20EH on the BG-20B ................................................... 3-46
Figure 3-39: Removing the BG-20E from the BG-20B ................................................ 3-47
Figure 3-40: Inserting the thin flat-head tool ................................................................ 3-48
Figure 3-41: Raising the rivet cap ................................................................................ 3-48
Figure 3-42: Removing the rivet ................................................................................... 3-48
Figure 3-43: BG-20EH regular slots layout .................................................................. 3-49
Figure 3-44: BG-20EH slots layout with ES 3# extended ............................................ 3-49
Figure 3-45: Installing the INF_E2U in the BG-20EH .................................................. 3-50
Figure 3-46: Installing an FCU_20EH in the BG-20EH ................................................ 3-51
Figure 3-47: Installing an extension card in the BG-20EH ........................................... 3-52
Figure 3-48: Installing ETSI brackets ........................................................................... 3-54
Figure 3-49: Installing the BG-20C in an ETSI rack ..................................................... 3-55
Figure 3-50: Installing ETSI brackets ........................................................................... 3-56
Figure 3-51: Installing the BG-20C in a 19" rack ......................................................... 3-57
Figure 3-52: Installing 23 inch brackets ....................................................................... 3-58
Figure 3-53: Installing the BG-20C in a 23" rack ......................................................... 3-59
Figure 3-54: Installing the ETSI mounting shelf ........................................................... 3-60
Figure 3-55: Attaching mounting brackets to the BG-20C ........................................... 3-61
Figure 3-56: Installing a BG-20C in an ETSI rack ........................................................ 3-62
Figure 3-57: Installing the 23" mounting shelf .............................................................. 3-63
Figure 3-58: Attaching mounting brackets to the BG-20C ........................................... 3-64
Figure 3-59: Installing a BG-20C in a 23" rack ............................................................ 3-65
Figure 4-1: Wall-mounted cabinet general view............................................................. 4-2
Figure 4-2: Wall-mounted cabinet interior components ................................................. 4-4
Figure 4-3: Preparing the rear panel holes .................................................................... 4-5
Figure 4-4: Tools required for cabinet installation .......................................................... 4-6
Figure 4-5: Installing the rear panel ............................................................................... 4-7
Figure 4-6: Installing the support rails ............................................................................ 4-7
Figure 4-7: Installing the 19" vertical extrusions ............................................................ 4-8
Figure 4-8: Installing the C-rail ....................................................................................... 4-9
Figure 4-9: Cabling accessories installed in the cabinet .............................................. 4-10
Figure 4-10: Cabling accessories ................................................................................ 4-11
Figure 4-11: DDF general view .................................................................................... 4-14
vi
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
List of Figures
Figure 4-12: Installing the brackets for ETSI installation ............................................. 4-15
Figure 4-13: Attaching the connection blocks .............................................................. 4-16
Figure 4-14: Installing a BG platform and three DDFs ................................................. 4-18
Figure 4-15: Clip nuts distance in mm (BG and three DDFs) ...................................... 4-19
Figure 4-16: Installing a BG platform, two DDFs, and an AC CONV unit .................... 4-21
Figure 4-17: Clip nuts distance in mm (BG, two DDFs, AC CONV unit) ..................... 4-22
Figure 4-18: Wall-mounted cabinet cabling ................................................................. 4-25
Figure 4-19: Wall-mounted cabinet cables routing front view ...................................... 4-26
Figure 4-20: Wall-mounted cabinet cables routing left side view................................. 4-27
Figure 4-21: Installing top and bottom covers .............................................................. 4-33
Figure 4-22: Connecting grounding cables .................................................................. 4-34
Figure 4-23: Installing side covers ............................................................................... 4-35
Figure 4-24: Connecting grounding cables .................................................................. 4-35
Figure 4-25: Installing the front door ............................................................................ 4-36
Figure 4-26: Connecting the door grounding cable ..................................................... 4-37
Figure 4-27: Wall-mounted frame installation .............................................................. 4-38
Figure 4-28: Attaching the fiber guide tube .................................................................. 4-39
Figure 4-29: Holes location for wall-mounted frame .................................................... 4-40
Figure 4-30: Installing a BG and three DDFs ............................................................... 4-42
Figure 4-31: Installing a BG, a DDF, and a RAP-BG ................................................... 4-43
Figure 4-32: Installing a BG, a DDF, and an AC/DC CONV ........................................ 4-44
Figure 4-33: Installing a BG and a DDF ....................................................................... 4-45
Figure 4-34: Installing the front cover .......................................................................... 4-47
Figure 4-35: Routing and connecting cables and fibers in the wall-mounted
frame ............................................................................................................................ 4-49
Figure 4-36: Wall-mounted frame cable routing - left side view................................... 4-50
Figure A-1: PW-9300-1RU-DC input power connectors, pin function............................ A-2
Figure A-2: AC input power connectors ......................................................................... A-2
Figure A-3: Ethernet connector, PIN identification ......................................................... A-3
Figure A-4: T3/T4 connector, pin identification .............................................................. A-4
Figure A-5: RS-232 overhead connectors, pin identification ......................................... A-5
Figure A-6: RS-232 overhead cable .............................................................................. A-5
Figure A-7: RS-232 overhead cable label ...................................................................... A-5
Figure A-8: V.11 connector, pin identification ................................................................ A-7
Figure A-9: Alarms connector, pin identification ............................................................ A-8
Figure A-10: E1 connectors for MXC20, pin identification ........................................... A-10
Figure A-11: E1 connectors for MXC20, pin identification ........................................... A-15
Figure A-12: E1 connectors for ME1_21 and ME1_42, pin identification .................... A-19
Figure A-13: MGE_1_L1 connector, pin identification ................................................. A-24
426006-2332-013-A04
vii
List of Figures

Maintenance Manual
Figure A-14: SM_10E traffic module connector, pin identification ............................... A-27
Figure A-15: 25-pin D-type male connector, pin identification ..................................... A-40
Figure A-16: 9-pin D-type male connector, pin identification ....................................... A-41
Figure A-17: M34 female connector, pin identification ................................................. A-43
Figure A-18: 15-pin D-type female connector, pin identification .................................. A-44
Figure A-19: 25-pin D-type male connector, pin identification ..................................... A-45
Figure A-20: 37-pin D-type female connector, pin identification .................................. A-46
Figure A-21: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector, pin identification ............................ A-50
Figure A-22: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector, pin identification ............................ A-51
Figure B-1: Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks .............................................................. B-3
Figure B-2: Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks ................................................... B-4
Figure B-3: Rack mounting diagram for attachment to suspended overhead
tray (2200 mm rack) ....................................................................................................... B-5
Figure B-4: Example of an approved European 19 rack .............................................. B-6
Figure C-1: BG-20 License Label ................................................................................. C-3
viii
426006-2332-013-A04
List of Tables
Table 1-1:
BG-20B modules ................................................................................... 1-3
Table 1-2:
BG-20E modules ................................................................................... 1-4
Table 1-3:
SM_10E traffic modules ........................................................................ 1-5
Table 2-1:
Typical BG-20 equipment installation sequence ................................... 2-2
Table 2-2:
Environmental requirements ................................................................. 2-5
Table 2-3:
Equipment dimensions .......................................................................... 2-6
Table 2-4:
Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools ....................................... 2-7
Table 2-5:
Traffic cables mating connector data .................................................. 2-14
Table 2-6:
Optical fibers and mating connector data ............................................ 2-16
Table 2-7:
BG-20 -DC circuit breaker data ........................................................... 2-19
Table 2-8:
BG-20C -DC circuit breaker data ........................................................ 2-19
Table 2-9:
LC transceivers laser information STM-4 SFP .................................... 2-21
Table 2-10:
LC transceivers laser information STM-1/100BaseFX SFP ................ 2-22
Table 2-11:
LC transceivers laser information GbE SFP (OTGBE) ....................... 2-22
Table 3-1:
Outline of typical BG-20B equipment installation sequence ................. 3-4
Table 3-2:
BG-20EH modules............................................................................... 3-49
Table 5-1:
Card and module inventory ................................................................... 5-2
Table 5-2:
Visual inspection and mechanical checks ............................................. 5-3
Table 5-3:
Measured optical levels ......................................................................... 5-4
Table 5-4:
2 Mbps tests .......................................................................................... 5-5
Table 5-5:
34 Mbps tests ........................................................................................ 5-6
Table 5-6:
45 Mbps tests ........................................................................................ 5-6
Table 5-7:
SDH tests .............................................................................................. 5-6
Table 5-8:
Traffic stability test time intervals .......................................................... 5-9
Table 5-9:
Throughput and latency test results .................................................... 5-12
Table 5-10:
Frame loss rate test results ................................................................. 5-13
Table 6-1:
Preventive maintenance inspection and checks ................................... 6-2
Table 6-2:
Troubleshooting power problems .......................................................... 6-4
Table 6-3:
General troubleshooting procedures for BG-20B/BG-20C power-on .... 6-5
Table 6-4:
General troubleshooting procedures for MXC20 ................................... 6-9
Table 6-5:
General troubleshooting procedures for optical transceiver plug-ins .. 6-11
Table 6-6:
Troubleshooting procedures for M345_3 cards .................................. 6-13
Table 6-7:
Troubleshooting procedures for
ME1_21/ME1_21H/ME1_42/ME1_42H cards ............................................................. 6-14
Table 6-8:
Troubleshooting procedures for
SMD1/SMD1H/OMS4B/OMS4H cards ........................................................................ 6-15
426006-2332-013-A04
ix
List of Tables

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-9:
Troubleshooting procedures for MEoP_4/MEoP_4H cards ................ 6-16
Table 6-10:
Troubleshooting procedures for MGE_1_L1 cards ............................. 6-17
Table 6-11:
General troubleshooting procedures for extended cards
PE1_63/P345_3E/ SM_10E/ESW_2G_8F_/MPS_2G_8F_E/S1_4) ........................... 6-19
Table 6-12:
Special troubleshooting procedures for P345_3E cards ..................... 6-20
Table 6-13:
Special troubleshooting procedures for ESW_2G_8F_E cards .......... 6-20
Table 6-14:
General troubleshooting procedures for daughterboards on
SM_10E cards ............................................................................................................. 6-21
Table 6-15:
Special troubleshooting procedures for SM_EOP
daughterboards ............................................................................................................ 6-22
Table 6-16:
Special troubleshooting procedures for OW box................................. 6-22
Table A-1:
Ethernet connector, pin assignment ...................................................... A-3
Table A-2:
T3/T4 connector, PIN identification ....................................................... A-4
Table A-3:
RS-232 connectors, pin assignment ..................................................... A-6
Table A-4:
OW connector, pin assignment ............................................................. A-6
Table A-5:
V.11 overhead connector, pin assignment ............................................ A-7
Table A-6:
Alarms connector, pin assignment ........................................................ A-8
Table A-7:
1-11 E1 connector (lower), pin assignment ......................................... A-10
Table A-8:
12-21 E1 connector (upper), pin assignment ...................................... A-12
Table A-9:
1-11 E1 connector (lower), pin assignment ......................................... A-15
Table A-10:
12-21 E1 connector (upper), pin assignment ...................................... A-17
Table A-11:
ME1_21/ME1_42 E1 connector (P1), pin assignment ........................ A-20
Table A-12:
ME1_21/ME1_42 E1 connector (P1), pin assignment ........................ A-22
Table A-13:
assignment
Gigabit Ethernet connector (1000Base-T/RJ-45), pin

............................................................................................................. A-25
Table A-14:
assignment
SM_10E SM_FXO_8 and SM_FXS_8 connector, pin

............................................................................................................. A-27
Table A-15:
SM_10E SM_EM_24W6E connector, pin assignment ........................ A-28
Table A-16:
SM_10E SM_V35E connector, pin assignment .................................. A-30
Table A-17:
SM_10E SM_V24E connector, pin assignment for 8 x V.24
transparent without controls mode ............................................................................... A-32
Table A-18:
SM_V24E connector, pin assignment ................................................. A-33
Table A-19:
SM_10E SM_V24E connector, pin assignment for 2 x V.24
synchronous with controls mode .................................................................................. A-34
Table A-20:
SM_10E SM_V35_V11 connector, pin assignment ............................ A-35
Table A-21:
SM_10E SM_CODIR_4E connector, pin assignment ......................... A-36
Table A-22:
SM_10E SM_OMNI_E connector, pin assignment ............................. A-37
Table A-23:
ICP_VF RJ-45 connector, pin assignment for serving
SM_FXS_8E or SM_FXO_8E ...................................................................................... A-39
Table A-24:
SM_EM_24W6E ........................................................................................................... A-39
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
List of Tables
Table A-25:
SM_CODIR_4E ............................................................................................................ A-40
Table A-26:
ICP_V24 synchronous V.24 25-pin D-type connector,
pin assignment ............................................................................................................. A-41
Table A-27:
ICP_V24 asynchronous V.24 9-pin D-type connector,
pin assignment ............................................................................................................. A-42
Table A-28:
ICP_V24 transparent V.24 9-pin D-type connector,
pin assignment ............................................................................................................. A-42
Table A-29:
ICP_V35 M34 female connector, pin assignment ............................... A-43
Table A-30:
ICP_V11_V24 15-pin D-type connector, pin assignment .................... A-44
Table A-31:
ICP_V11_V24 V.24 25-pin D-type connector, pin assignment ........... A-45
Table A-32:
ICP_DB37D 37 pin D-type connector, pin assignment ....................... A-46
Table A-33:
ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, RS-449 pin assignment .......... A-47
Table A-34:
ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, RS-422 pin assignment .......... A-47
Table A-35:
ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, V.36 pin assignment............... A-48
Table A-36:
ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, V.35 pin assignment............... A-48
Table A-37:
ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, V.11/X.24 pin assignment ...... A-49
Table A-38:
ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, synchronous V.24
pin assignment ............................................................................................................. A-49
Table A-39:
RAP-4B PLATFORM ALARM connector, pin assignment .................. A-50
Table A-40:
RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector, pin assignment.......................... A-52
426006-2332-013-A04
xi
List of Tables
xii

Maintenance Manual
426006-2332-013-A04
About This Manual

In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... xiii
Intended Audience ........................................................................................... xiii
Document Organization ................................................................................... xiii
Document Conventions ................................................................................... xiv
Related Documentation .................................................................................... xv
Obtaining Technical Documentation ................................................................ xv
Technical Assistance ....................................................................................... xvi
Overview
The BroadGate (BG) BG-20 Installation, Operation, and Maintenance
Manual (IOMM) describes how to install BG-20 platforms and how to install
and replace hardware components, including cards, modules, and accessories.
Intended Audience
The BG-20 IOMM is intended for installation and other qualified service
personnel responsible for installing the platform and its accessories.
Document Organization
This manual contains the following information:
Installation
Operation
Maintenance
Additional functionality
426006-2332-013-A04
xiii
About This Manual

Maintenance Manual
Document Conventions
When applicable, this manual uses the following conventions.
Convention
Indicates
Example
Bold
Names of windows, dialog

boxes, menus, buttons, and
most other GUI elements
On the Alarms menu...
Menu > Option
Selection from a menu, or

leading to another command
Select Update > View

Objects
Italics
New terms, emphasized text,

and names of manuals and
documents
Examples in text
Borders around text
Notes, cautions, and warnings
See examples below
NOTE: Text set off in this manner presents clarifying

information, specific instructions, commentary, sidelights, or
interesting points of information.
CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure
to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or
loss of information.
WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure

to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life.
LASER WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates
how to avoid personal injury. All personnel involved in
equipment installation, operation, and maintenance must be
aware that laser radiation is invisible. Therefore, although
protective devices generally prevent direct exposure to the
beam, personnel must strictly observe the applicable safety
precautions and, in particular, must avoid staring into optical
connectors, either directly or using optical instruments.
ESD: Text set off in this manner indicates information on
how to avoid discharge of static electricity and subsequent
damage to the unit.
xiv
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
About This Manual
TIP: Text set off in this manner includes helpful information

and handy hints that can make your task easier.
IMPORTANT: Text set off in this manner presents essential

information to which you must pay attention.
Related Documentation
The following publications may be of assistance to you in the installation and
commissioning processes. Some of these documents present information
supplied in this Installation Manual in greater or lesser detail.
BroadGate Product Line General Description
BroadGate Product Line System Specifications
BroadGate Product Line Reference Manual
BroadGate EMS-BGF User Manual
BroadGate LCT-BGF User Manual
LightSoft Network Management System User Manual
IEC Publication 825 - Laser Safety Requirements
Obtaining Technical
Documentation
To obtain technical documentation related to ECI Telecom products, contact:
ECI Telecom Ltd.
Documentation Department
30 Hasivim St.
Petach Tikva 49130
Israel
Fax: +972-3-9268060
Email: techdoc.feedback@ecitele.com
426006-2332-013-A04
xv
About This Manual

Maintenance Manual
Technical Assistance
The configuration, installation, and operation of the BG-20 and its operation in
a network are highly specialized processes. Due to the different nature of each
installation, some planning aspects may not be covered in this manual.
If you have questions or concerns about your network design or if you require
installation personnel to perform the actual installation process, ECI Telecom
maintains a staff of design engineers and highly trained field service personnel.
The services of this group are available to customers at any time.
If you are interested in obtaining design assistance or a network installation
plan from ECI Telecom's Customer Support team, contact your ECI Telecom
sales representative. With any support related issues, technical or logistic,
please contact the ECI Telecom Customer Support center at your location. If
you are not familiar with that location, please contact our central customer
support center action line at:
Telephone
+972-3-9266000
Telefax
+972-3-9266370
Email
on.support@ecitele.com
ECI Telecom's BroadGate and XDM product lines are

certified to comply with MEF9 and MEF14 standards.
xvi
426006-2332-013-A04
1
Introduction
In this chapter:
BG-20 Platform Overview............................................................................... 1-1
BG-20 Platform Options .................................................................................. 1-2
BG-20 Platform Overview

ECI Telecoms BG-20 miniature MSPP delivers a cost-effective and affordable
mix of Ethernet, SDH, PDH, and PCM services, resulting in new
revenue-generating opportunities. It offers a wide variety of features and
benefits, including:
Ultra-high scalability based on coupling the BG-20E to the BG-20B to

make a build-as-you-grow solution.
Gradual capacity expansion based on service provisioning needs. More

STM-1 interfaces can be added very conveniently and ADM-1s can be
upgraded to ADM-4s without affecting traffic. This highly adaptable and
flexible architecture translates into significant savings in both operational
and capital expenditures (OPEX and CAPEX).
Provides a carrier class Ethernet-over-WAN/MAN solution (including

Ethernet over SDH and Ethernet over PDH) with SDH reliability, security,
and management of data services.
Sublambda grooming for high utilization of existing fiber and top

efficiency in transmission of different types of services.
PCM service interfaces and 1/0 digital cross-connect functions to facilitate

the construction and maintenance of various private networks.
426006-2332-013-A04
1-1
Introduction

Maintenance Manual
Multi-ADM and cross-connect functionality, ideal for deployment in

flexible network topologies like ring, mesh, and star.
Compactness and resiliency perfectly suited for both indoor and outdoor
enclosures. Due to its extended operating temperature range, it is also most
suitable for harsh environmental conditions.
For a detailed description of the BG-20 platform, see the BroadGate Product
Line General Description.
Figure 1-1: Typical BG-20 shelf
Figure 1-2: BG-20C shelf
BG-20 Platform Options

The BG-20 is extremely versatile, consisting of the basic platform (XDM-500)
and an optional expansion platform (BG-20E). The BG-20 has the following
four main configuration options:
1-2
XDM-500_L1: an ADM-1 or ADM-4 that can provide 21 x E1 and 6 x FE

L1 interfaces, and an additional 21/42 x E1, 3 x E3/DS-3, 2 x STM-1, or
1 x STM-4 interfaces.
XDM-500_L2: an ADM-1 or ADM-4 that can provide 21 x E1 and 6 x FE

L2 interfaces, and an additional 21/42 x E1, 3 x E3/DS-3, 2 x STM-1, or
1 x STM-4 interfaces.
BG-20C_DC: an ADM-1 that can provide 21 x E1 and 4 x FE L2

(MPLS-ready) interfaces, or expand from ADM-1 to ADM-4 or from 1 x
FE to 4 x FE (1 port granularity) by license permission. The BG-20C_DC
is a single-board system and does not support any expansion slots. It does
support a dual DC power supply feeding.
BG-20C_AC: provides the same functionality as the BG-20C_DC, but with

an AC power supply feeding.
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Introduction
XDM-500_L1 plus BG-20E: provides all the interfaces of the

XDM-500_L1, plus additional E1, E3/DS-3, Ethernet L2, and PCM
interfaces using the BG-20E platform.
XDM-500_L2 plus BG-20E: provides all the interfaces of the

XDM-500_L2, plus additional E1, E3/DS-3, Ethernet L2, and PCM
XDM-500_L2M: an ADM-1 or ADM-4 that can provide 21 x E1 and 6 x

FE L2 (MPLS-ready) interfaces, and an additional 21/42 x E1, 3 x
E3/DS-3, 2 x STM-1, or 1 x STM-4 interfaces.
XDM-500_L2M plus BG-20E: provides all the interfaces of the

BG-20B_L2M, plus additional E1, E3/DS-3, Ethernet L2, and PCM
Based on a modular design, the BG-20 gives you many system configuration
options and offers a true pay-as-you-grow solution.
The following table lists the modules supported in V14 that can be configured
in each slot in the XDM-500.
Table 1-1:
BG-20B modules
Name
BG-20B L1
Description
1
MS
DS
Cross-connect, timing control,

21 x E1 2, 6 x FE L1, and 2 x
STM-1/4 interface card
BG-20B_L2 3

21 x E1 4, 6 x FE L2, and 2 x
STM-1/4 interface card
BG-20B_L2M 5

21 x E1 6, 6 x FE L2 (MPLS
ready), and 2 x STM-1/4
interface card
SMD1H
2 x STM-1 O/E module
OMS4H
1 x STM-4 module
ME1_42H
PS
42 x E1 module
Requires ordering the BG-20B-L1 unit.

The BG-20B basic unit and Dslot E1 modules only support balanced E1 interfaces. For unbalanced E1 interfaces,
use an external balancedtounbalanced conversion unit, the xDDF-21.
3
Requires ordering the BG-20B-L2 unit.
4
5
Requires ordering the BG-20B-L2M unit.
6
7
2
426006-2332-013-A04
1-3
Introduction

Maintenance Manual
Name
Description
MS
DS
PS
ME1_21H
21 x E1 module
M345_3
3 x DS-3/E3 module
MEoP_4H
4 x FE module providing
Ethernet over PDH (EoP) L1
processing
MGE_1_L1
1 x GbE module providing

GbE L1 processing
ME_2G_4F
2 x GbE/FE + 2 x FE +2 x FX
module providing L2
processing (MPLS-ready)
INF_20-B
Power filter unit (-48 VDC)
AC_CONV-20B
Power conversion unit

(110/220 VAC)
All BG-20B_L1, BG-20B_L2, and BG-20B_L2M have additional options

according to the licenses purchased. The same hardware with different licenses
can compose different configurations, based on a combination of the following:
ADM-1 or ADM-4
0-6 activated FE interfaces (Layer 2 only)
The BG-20 licensing scheme provides a pay-as-you-grow solution with a very

fine granularity.
The following table lists the supported modules that can be configured in each
slot in the BG-20E.
Table 1-2:
BG-20E modules
Name
Description
9
ES1
ES2
ES3
PE1_63
63 x E1 card
P345_3E
3 x DS-3/E3 card
S1_4
4 x STM-1 O/E module
SM_10E
DXC1/0 and PCM interface card

(24-channel N 64 Kbps)
ESW_2G_8F_E
Ethernet card with metro L2 switch

(16 FE Ethernet over SDH (EoS)
WAN interfaces +
8 x 10/100BaseT +
2 x 1000Base-SX/LX)
PS
9
The PE1_63 supports only balanced E1 interfaces. For unbalanced E1 interfaces, an external
balancedtounbalanced conversion unit, the xDDF-21, should be used.
1-4
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Introduction
Name
Description
ES1
ES2
ES3
MPS_2G_8F
Ethernet card with metro L2 switch

(64 x EoS WAN interfaces +
8 x 10/100BaseT +
2 x GbE/FE (combo))
DMCE1_32
CES card supporting 32 x E1

balanced interfaces on the TDM side
and a FE/GbE combo port on the
Ethernet side (SAToP and
CESoPSN)
MPoE_12G
MPLS over Ethernet and Power over

Ethernet card supporting 4 x GbE/FX
ports and 8 x 10/100/1000BaseT
ports (MPLS-TP ready)
AC_CONV_20E Power conversion unit

(90 VAC to 240 VAC)
PS
The SM_10E is a complex card consisting of a base card and up to three traffic
modules that provide additional flexibility for functionality as well as the
number of supported interfaces. The following table lists the traffic modules
supported in V14 that can be configured in each module slot of the SM_10E.
Additional types of Dslot modules, extension cards, and SM_10E traffic
modules will be supported in future versions.
Table 1-3:
SM_10E traffic modules
Name
Description
MS1#
MS2#
MS3#
SM_FXO_8E
Eight FXO channels
SM_FXS_8E
Eight FXS or FXD channels
SM_EM_24W6E
Six 2W, 4W, and 6W E&M

channels
SM_V24E
V.24 with three modes:

Transparent (eight
channels)
Async with controls (four
channels)
Sync with controls (two
channels)
SM_V35_V11
2x
V.35/V.11/V.24/V.36/RS-422/
RS-449 64Kbps channels can
be mapped to unframed E1 or
N x 64Kbps of framed E1
SM_EOP
2 x FE module providing EoP

L1 processing
426006-2332-013-A04
1-5
Introduction

Maintenance Manual
Name
Description
MS1#
MS2#
MS3#
SM_CODIR_4E
4 x codirectional 64 Kbps
channels (G.703)
SM_OMNI_E
OmniBus 64 Kbps channel
SM_C37.94
2 x teleprotection interfaces
per IEEE C37.94
NOTE:
1-6
It is recommended that the BG-20 platform be installed in

ECI Telecoms ETSI rack (2200 mm or 2600 mm). It can
also be installed in standard ETSI and US 23 racks with
filters or in 19 racks without filters, which have been
approved by ECI Telecom.
A bandwidth upgrade from ADM-1 to ADM-4 or the
activation of any of the six Ethernet (Layer 2) ports in
XDM-500 requires the purchase of an appropriate license.
426006-2332-013-A04
2
Before You Start
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 2-1
Outline of the Installation Procedure ............................................................... 2-2
Site Preparation ............................................................................................... 2-5
Tools and Test Equipment ............................................................................... 2-7
Installation of BG-20 in Racks ........................................................................ 2-7
Preparing Cables and Fibers .......................................................................... 2-10
Work and Equipment Safety.......................................................................... 2-17
Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge ................................................... 2-23
Overview
This chapter contains important information that will help you carry out a safe
and trouble-free installation.
426006-2332-013-A04
2-1
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
Outline of the Installation

Procedure
The main steps involved in the installation of BG-20 equipment are described
in the following table. Consult your site installation plans for specific details.
Table 2-1:
Typical BG-20 equipment installation sequence
No. Task
2-2
Reference
Prepare the installation site and check the

physical location, environmental compliance,
and availability of power sources.
Before You Start (page 2-1)
Prepare power, alarm, management, and

transmission cables at the installation site.
Before You Start (page 2-1)

and Equipment Installation
(page 3-1)
Route the required power, alarm,

management, and transmission cables to the
intended BG-20 equipment location.
Equipment Installation (page 31)
If required, install the equipment racks.
Mark the location of each BG-20B shelf,

Equipment Installation (page 3BG-20E shelf, and relevant accessories
1)
(BG-OW box, Fiber Storage Tray (FST),
Optical Distribution Frame (ODF), PCM
Interconnection Panels (ICPs), and Digital
Distribution Frame (DDF) on each rack, in
accordance with the site installation plan.
Notes:
For each BG-20B, it is recommended that
you leave at least 4 U of space above the
BG-20B shelf to enable future installation
of the BG-20E shelf.
The BG-20B can only support balanced
E1 interfaces directly. For unbalanced
E1s, the xDDF-21 patch panel must be
configured, which provides conversion
between balanced and unbalanced E1s for
21 x E1.
When PCM interfaces are provided by the
SM_10E, the corresponding ICPs can be
installed in order to simplify installation
and connection to customer termination
equipment.
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
No. Task
Before You Start
Reference
When applicable, install the EMS-BGF

management station.
Install the Rack Alarm Panel (RAP) and other Installing the RAP-BG, or
equipment needed in each rack.
Installing the RAP-4B (page 315)
Install the BG-20B shelves in the appropriate

rack.
For each BG-20B shelf where optical modules Grounding the BG-20B Shelf
are used, install an FST under the BG-20B
(page 3-33)
shelf and route the optical fibers to the FST.
NOTE: Even if you are not currently
installing an FST, it is recommended that you
leave enough space beneath the BG-20B shelf
to enable future installation.
10
Install the prescribed power-feeding module

in the BG-20B shelf.
Installing Power Modules in

the BG-20B (page 3-33)
11
Install the prescribed Dslot module in the

BG-20B shelf, where relevant.
Installing Dslot Modules (page

3-34)
12
Install the SFP modules.
Installing SFP Modules (page

3-35)
13
When applicable, install the BG-OW box.
14
Installing the BG-20E Shelf in

When applicable, install the BG-20E and
the Rack (page 3-37)
relevant accessories, including:
The BG-20E shelf on the BG-20B
The prescribed power-feeding module in
the BG-20E shelf
The prescribed extension cards in the
BG-20E shelf
The xDDF-21 units for PE1_63, if needed
ICPs for the SM_10E, if needed
426006-2332-013-A04
EMS-BGF Installation Manual
Installing the BG-20B Shelf in

the Rack (page 3-31)
2-3
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
No. Task
2-4
Reference
15
Depending on the modules or cards in your

Equipment Installation (page 3BG-20 shelf:
1)
Route the PDH electrical cables from the
DDF to the E1 interfaces on the BG-20B,
ME1_21, ME1_21H, ME1_42,
ME1_42H, and PE1_63 front panel, the
E3/DS-3 interfaces on the M345_3 and
P345_3E front panel, and STM-1e
interfaces on the STM-1 electrical SFPs.
Route the data cables to the FE interfaces
on the BG-20B, MEoP_4, MPS_2G_8F,
and ESW_2G_8F_E front panel.
If ICPs are installed, route the special
cables to connect ICPs and their relevant
SM_10E modules, and route the voice and
data cables from the VDF to the interfaces
on the ICP panel. If ICPs are not installed,
route the voice and data cables from the
VDF to the interfaces on the front panel
of the SM_10E module.
Note: The DDF can be installed on the same
rack as the BG-20 shelf, or on a different rack.
16
Connect management cables between the

equipment installed in the rack and the
management station.
17
Connect power cables from the RAP panel to

each BG-20B and BG-20E installed in the
rack. Connect alarm monitoring cables from
the RAP panels to each BG-20B installed in
the rack.
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
Site Preparation
Perform a preliminary survey of the installation site, taking into consideration
the following issues:
System environmental requirements
Physical location of the BG-20 shelves
Location of power sources
Types of interfaces used at the site (optical, electrical, management, alarm

monitoring, and so on)
Work and equipment safety requirements
Environmental Requirements
The environmental conditions listed in the following table apply to BG-20
equipment and must be ensured at the installation site.
Table 2-2:
Environmental requirements
Parameter
Compliance requirements
Electromagnetic interference
EN 55022/94, EN 50082-1/92
Temperature
ETSI ETS 300-19-2-3 Test Spec. T3.1
Physical Location
WARNING: BG-20 shelves are intended for installation in
restricted-access areas only.
Before you start:
Choose the physical location of the BG-20 shelves, taking the following
aspects into consideration:
1. Equipment dimensions (see the following table).
2. Required floor loading capability: 100 kg for a typical eight-shelf
installation.
3. Routing requirements for grounding, power, alarm monitoring, and
management cables, and optical fibers. To ensure convenient access to
cables and fibers, it is recommended, whenever possible, to use overhead
cable ladders to bring the cables/fibers to the top of each rack.
4. When a network management station, for example, the EMS-BGF, is
installed on the site, consider the method of connection to the local network
management station and the maximum allowed distance.
426006-2332-013-A04
2-5
Before You Start
Table 2-3:

Maintenance Manual
Equipment dimensions
Equipment type
Height (mm)
Width (mm)
Depth (mm)
Max. weight (kg)
BG-20B
44
440
243
BG-20E
88.9
440
243
BG-20C
44
223.5
224
RAP-BG
88
440
150
RAP-4B
88
447
155
2.4
FST
44.5
440
240
ODF
44.5
440
240
xDDF-21
44.5
440
150
1.5
ICP_VF
44
465
140
1.5
ICP_V24
44
465
140
1.5
ICP_V24F
44
465
140
1.5
ICP_V11_V24
44
465
140
1.5
ICP_V35
44
465
140
1.5
Power Sources
BG-20 shelves can be powered by DC sources complying with the applicable
sections of ETSI 300 132-2 and the SELV or TNV requirements of EN 60950.
The nominal supply voltage is -48 VDC (positive-lead grounded). However,
the allowed supply voltage range is -40.5 VDC to -60 VDC. Power feeding for
the BG-20B shelf and the BG-20E shelf are separate. For redundancy, two
separate DC power sources should be available. In the DC power supply, the
maximum power consumption of the BG-20B is 50 W and the maximum
power consumption of the BG-20E is 130 W.
BG-20 shelves can also be powered directly from standard AC power outlets.
The nominal AC supply voltage is 220 V/50 Hz or 110 V/60 Hz. The allowed
range is 94 VAC to 240 VAC. In the AC power supply, power feeding for the
BG-20B and BG-20E shelves is separate. Because of the efficiency of the
AC/DC conversion in the AC power supply, the maximum power consumption
of the BG-20B is 62.5 W and the maximum power consumption of the BG-20E
is 162.5 W.
NOTE: If the planned power consumption of the equipment
installed in the shelf is 80% or more of the maximum listed
value, it is recommended to consult ECI Telecom Customer
Support.
2-6
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
Tools and Test Equipment

No special-purpose tools beyond a standard technicians toolbox are required
for the installation of BG-20 shelves.
Since traffic cables can be prepared on site, suitable tool kits should be
available. They include tools for the assembly of coaxial cables (see the list of
recommended tools in the following table) and tools for the preparation of
optical patch cords.
Table 2-4:
No.
Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools
Name
Description
Stripper
DIN 1.0/2.3
Center contact crimp tool (blue)
DIN 1.0/2.3
Crimp tool, outer
DIN 1.0/2.3
Cable stripper
---
Nipper (cutter for center contact)
---
Die for NCX1
---
Cleaning Optical Connectors

When handling optical fibers, clean the optical connectors using the standard
cleaning kits recommended by the optical connector manufacturers.
Installation of BG-20 in Racks

Installation Plan
This section provides guidelines for planning the installation of BG-20 shelves
and ancillary equipment in racks.
We recommend installation in ECI Telecoms ETSI racks, which provide the
following advantages:
Removable rear and side panels, enabling tidy leading and efficient
maintenance of all rack cables, including:
PCM/El/E3/DS-3/STM-1e cables
Control cables
Power cables
Data cables
Voice frequency cables
Timing cables
426006-2332-013-A04
2-7
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
Two ducts on the racks front rails for routing up to 200 optical fibers
Open frame top and bottom, facilitating easy leading of cables from
suspension floors and/or ceiling ladders
Front-door mountable for left or right opening
BG-20 equipment racks may be installed on wooden, concrete, or floating

floors, or suspended from overhead mountings.
Typical BG-20 Installation

For a typical installation of a BG-20 shelf in an ECI Telecoms ETSI rack, see
Typical installation of a single BG-20 shelf in a 2200 ETSI rack (page 3-3). In
this figure, two BG-20 shelves are shown with the BG-20E and the other two
shelves are shown without the BG-20E.
In addition to the BG-20 itself, the equipment installed in the rack includes:
One RAP installed at the top of the rack. The RAP is used to connect
external power and alarm monitoring lines (RAP-4B only) to the BG-20
shelves installed in the rack. The RAP fully supports up to four shelves
with dual power feeding or eight shelves with single power feeding. In
addition to the space needed for RAP installation, you must leave at least
50 mm of free space under the RAP for cable routing.
NOTE: The RAP-BG does not support alarm monitoring
lines.
2-8
Fiber Storage Tray. A separate FST can be installed for each BG-20 with
optical modules. Each FST contains two storage reels, enabling the fiber to
be stored on the right or left side of the tray. Leave at least 50 mm of free
space between the BG-20 shelf and its FST, and another 50 mm free
between the FST and the next BG-20 shelf.
BG-OW. An external box that adds an orderwire interface and functionality

to the BG-20. It can be installed on either the left or the right rail of the
rack. It should be installed in the most suitable place for convenient
operation.
xDDF-21. When unbalanced E1 interfaces are needed, the xDDF-21 should

be installed with the BG-20. Each xDDF-21 can support 21 channels of E1.
The xDDF-21 can be installed anywhere on the same rack on which the
BG-20 shelf is installed, or on another rack.
ICPs for the SM_10E, including ICP_VF, ICP_V24, ICP_V24F,

ICP_V11_V24, and ICP_V35. When PCM interfaces are provided by the
SM_10E, the corresponding ICPs can be installed in order to simplify
installation and connection to customer termination equipment. Each ICP
can support one SM_10E traffic module. ICPs can be installed anywhere on
the same rack on which the BG-20 shelf is installed, or on another rack.
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
Integrating BG-20 Shelves and Other

Equipment in One Rack
BG-20 shelves and associated accessories may not occupy the entire rack.
Additional equipment may be installed in the remaining rack space, provided
that any heat generated by additional equipment can be efficiently dissipated,
and thermal isolation is provided between the various equipment units installed
in the same rack.
In the event of additional equipment being installed on the rack, contact ECI
Telecoms Customer Support team for assistance.
Figure 2-1: Typical installation of four BG-20 shelves
426006-2332-013-A04
2-9
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
Preparing Cables and Fibers

NOTE: This section provides information needed for
preparing cables and optical fibers. The necessary cables can
be ordered from ECI Telecom. For details, contact ECI
Telecoms Customer Support team or your ECI Telecom sales
representative.
Before you start:
The following main types of cables are required for installing the BG-20:
Grounding Cables (page 2-11)
DC Power Cables (page 2-11)
AC Power Cable (page 2-13)
Alarm Cables (page 2-13)
Management Cables (page 2-13)
Timing (Clock) Cables (page 2-13)
Orderwire Cables (page 2-14)
Electric Traffic Cables (page 2-14)
Optical Fibers (page 2-16)
Some of these cables are supplied by ECI Telecom as part of the BG-20
equipment, while others must be prepared on site or ordered separately from
ECI Telecom.
In the following sections, you will find information about the cables, as well as
information to enable the preparation of cables on site, where relevant. For
further details about the equipment connector types and cable wiring, see
Connection Data (page A-1).
WARNING: When preparing cables, in particular power and
grounding cables, use only UL-listed components of the
specified types. Components must also comply with any
applicable national and local safety codes and regulations.
Only qualified trained personnel may be involved in the
preparation of the various cable types. Personnel must use
only approved procedures, in accordance with the applicable
workmanship practice.
2-10
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
Grounding Cables
Shelf grounding is achieved by connecting the shelf to the rack using rack
mounting brackets. Grounding is provided by contact when the unit is fastened
to the rack.
A reliable low-impedance connection must be provided using copper
conductors between the rack frame and the site grounding bus.
Make the connection between the rack grounding screw and the site grounding
bus with a 2 AWG (35 mm2) or thicker copper lead with yellow/green
insulation, in compliance with UL/ETSI recommendations.
Route grounding conductors along the shortest possible route. Treat the bare
portion of the conductor with antioxidant and connect a listed two-hole
compression lug. If the lug is not plated, polish it until it has a bright finish and
coat it with antioxidant before connecting it to the frame of the rack. Do not
mix different types of metal conductors.
DC Power Cables
DC power cables should be prepared on site. Two types of DC power cables
are needed:
RAP input power cables
Shelf power cables
ECI Telecom recommends the use of shielded power cables for DC power
connections, with the shields connected to the frame ground at the rack end
only.
RAP Input Power Cables

The RAP input power cables are prepared on site. They connect input power
from the site power distribution subsystem to the DC input terminals of the
RAP.
Two input power cables are required for each rack, one for each source. The
cables must use copper leads complying with UL/ETSI recommendations. Use
a red lead for the positive conductor and a black lead for the negative
conductor. The RAP cable ends must be terminated in M6 cable lugs matching
the conductor gauge.
The recommended cable gauge is 25 mm2 or thicker. This gauge ensures that
the voltage drop across the rack power cable does not exceed 2 V, even for
cable runs of maximum 30 meters connected to a RAP and providing power to
multiple BG-20 shelves.
426006-2332-013-A04
2-11
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
When the RAP is used to provide power to a single BG-20 shelf, lower-lead
gauges may be used, as follows:
For runs not exceeding 20 meters, it is sufficient to use 10 mm2 copper

leads
For runs not exceeding 30 meters, it is sufficient to use 16 mm2 copper

leads
Shelf Power Cables

Two 12 AWG cables, supplied by ECI Telecom, are used to connect the input
power from the rack RAP unit to each POWER IN connector on the INF_20B
module of each BG-20B shelf installed in the rack.
If the BG-20E is installed, ECI Telecom can supply one of two power cable
options:
Two additional 12 AWG cables to connect the input power from the rack
RAP unit to each POWER IN connector on the INF_20E module. This
option requires separate circuit breaker positions for the BG-20E and the
BG-20B.
Two 12 AWG cables, each with two connectors on the BG-20B and
BG-20E sides, to connect one input power circuit breaker from the rack
RAP to one POWER IN connector of the INF_20B and one POWER IN of
the INF_20E. This option allows the use of the same circuit breaker
position for both shelves.
If the BG-OW is installed, an additional 12 AWG cable, supplied by ECI

Telecom, is used to connect the input power from the rack RAP unit to the
POWER IN connector on the front panel of the BG-OW, for each BG-OW box
installed in the rack.
NOTE:
2-12
For each BG-20 unit without a BG-20E, one shelf DC

power cable is needed when power feeding is
nonredundant, and two shelf DC power cables are needed
when power feeding is redundant. For each BG-20 unit
with a BG-20E, two shelf DC power cables or one
dual-headed shelf DC power cable are needed when
power feeding is nonredundant, and four shelf DC power
cables or two double-headed shelf DC power cables are
needed when power feeding is redundant.
The BG-OW only supports DC power feeding and does
not support redundant power feeding. For each BG-OW,
one shelf DC power cable is needed.
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
AC Power Cable
An AC power cable is provided, fully prepared with the system. One AC power
cable is required for a BG-20 shelf without the BG-20E, and two AC power
cables are required for a BG-20 shelf with the BG-20E.
The AC power cable comes with an AC male connector for connection to the
AC source outlet. Replace the AC male connector if it is not suitable for the
local AC source.
Alarm Cables
Alarm cables used within BG-20 equipment are included in the shipment
according to the site specifications.
The alarm indications are carried by the shelf alarm indication cable. One shelf
alarm indication cable is required for each BG-20 shelf installed in the rack.
This cable connects between the ALARMS connector on the BG-20B and one
of the ALARMS connectors on the RAP (RAP-4B only). Cable length is 2.0 m.
NOTE: There are no ALARMS connectors on the RAP-BG.
Management Cables
Out-of-band management traffic is connected to a BG-20 shelf via the RJ-45
(MNG) connector located on the front panel of the BG-20B.
The MNG Ethernet connector is wired as a 10BaseT station port for direct
connection through an RJ-45-to-RJ-45 straight cable to a port of a 10BaseT
Ethernet hub.
Suitable standard Ethernet station cables are available from many sources.
Cables of Category 5 or better must be used. In all cases, the length of the
cables must not exceed the maximum recommended for the cable type and hub
port in use (up to a few dozen meters).
Timing (Clock) Cables

The BG-20 shelf uses an RJ-45 connector on the BG-20B front panel that
integrates the two timing reference interfaces (2 x T3 and 2 x T4). If it has
balanced (120 ) G.703 interfaces, a multitwisted-pair cable with an RJ-45
connector (supplied by ECI Telecom) is used to connect timing signals from
the BG-20 to the site timing reference distribution subsystems.
If the site timing reference distribution subsystem has unbalanced (75 ) G.703
interfaces, an adapter with coaxial cables that provides balanced-to-unbalanced
conversion (supplied by ECI Telecom) should be configured.
426006-2332-013-A04
2-13
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
Orderwire Cables
When the BG-OW is installed, a cable with RJ-45 connectors on both sides
(supplied by ECI Telecom) should be used to connect the OW interface on the
BG-20B front panel and the BG-NE connector on the BG-OW front panel.
Another cable with RJ-11 connectors on both sides (supplied by ECI Telecom)
should be used to connect the HANDSET connector on the BG-OW front panel
to the OW handset. These cables are delivered with the BG-OW.
Electric Traffic Cables

Some electric traffic cables can be prepared on site. The following table lists
the type of cables and mating connectors needed for each BG-20 traffic
interface type.
Table 2-5:
Traffic cables mating connector data
Module or card
Interface type
Cable type
Mating
connector
Connector at
other end
Qty/
module
BG-20B
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Multipair cable
(2 x 11 120
twisted pairs)
50-pin SCSI male Open
ME1_21/H
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Multipair cable
(2 x 21 120
twisted pairs)
68-pin VHDCI
female
Open
ME1_42/H
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Multipair cable
(2 x 21 120
twisted pairs)
68-pin VHDCI
female
Open
PE1_63
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Multipair cable
(2 x 21 120
twisted pairs)
68-pin VHDCI
female
Open
BG-20B 10
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Twin multipair
cable (2 x 21
120 twisted
pairs)
2 x 50-pin SCSI
male
2 x 50-pin SCSI
male
ME1_21/H 11
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Multipair cable
(2 x 21 120
twisted pairs)
68-pin VHDCI
female
2 x 50-pin SCSI
male
ME1_42/H 12
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Multipair cable
(2 x 21 120
twisted pairs)
2 x 68-pin
VHDCI female
2 x 68-pin
VHDCI male
PE1_63 13
E1 balanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Multipair cable
(2 x 21 120
twisted pairs)
3 x 68-pin
VHDCI female
3 x 68-pin
VHDCI male
xDDF-21
E1 unbalanced
(2.048 Mbps)
Coaxial cable
DIN 1.0/2.3
Open (prepared
in the field)
42
BG-20B
STM-1 electrical
Coaxial cable
DIN 1.0/2.3
Open (prepared
in the field)
2/4
10
Cable is used to connect BG-20B E1 interface connectors to the xDDF-21.

12
13
11
2-14
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
Module or card
Interface type
Cable type
Mating
connector
Connector at
other end
Qty/
module
SMD1/H
STM-1 electrical
Coaxial cable
DIN 1.0/2.3
Open (prepared
in the field)
2/4
S1_4
STM-1 electrical
Coaxial cable
DIN 1.0/2.3
Open (prepared
in the field)
2/4/6/8
M345_3
E3/DS-3
(34/45 Mbps)
Coaxial cable
DIN 1.0/2.3
Open (prepared
in the field)
P345_3
E3/DS-3
(34/45 Mbps)
Coaxial cable
DIN 1.0/2.3
Open (prepared
in the field)
SM_FXO_8E
FXO
Multipair cable
(2 x 18 100
twisted pairs)
36-pin SCSI male Open
SM_FXS_8E
FXS/FXD
SM_EM_
24W6E
2W, 4W,
2WE&M, or
4WE&M
SM_V24E
V.24
SM_V35E
V.35
SM_V35_V11
V.35, V.11
SM_CODIR_4
E
Codirectional 64
Kbps
SM_FXO_
8E
FXO
SM_FXS_
8E
FXS/FXD
SM_EM_
24W6E
2W, 4W,
2WE&M, or
4WE&M
SM_V24E 14
V.24
SM_V35E 15
V.35
SM_CODIR_4
E 16
Codirectional 64
Kbps
ICP_VF
FXO, FXS, 2W,

4W, 2W
E&M,4W E&M,
or Codirectional
64 Kbps
Six-wire cable
(voice
frequency)
RJ-45
Open
ICP_V24
V.24 Sync with

controls
V.24 cable
15-pin D-type
female
Open
V.24 transparent
V.24 cable
9-pin D-type
female
Open
Multipair cable
(2 x 18 100
twisted pairs)
36-pin SCSI male 36-pin SCSI

male
V.24 Async with

controls
14
15
16
Cable is used to connect the SM_10E module to the applied ICP.

426006-2332-013-A04
2-15
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
Module or card
Interface type
Cable type
Mating
connector
ICP_V11_V24
V.11
V.11 cable
15-pin D-type
male
V.24
V.24 cable
25-pin D-type
male
V.35
V.35 cable
M34 male
ICP_V35
Connector at
other end
Open
Qty/
module
Optical Fibers
Optical fibers can be prepared on site. The following table lists the type of
cables and mating connectors needed to prepare cables for each BG-20 module.
For each optical interface, ECI Telecom supplies patch cords with mating
optical connectors already attached to the fiber. Therefore, only the optical
termination on the ODF side, which is installation-dependent, must be installed
on site.
The optical fibers for connecting to equipment installed in a given rack should
enter the rack from the top, be threaded through cable guides running along the
rack side rails, and end at the FST. The FST must contain enough fiber length
for extracting modules from the BG-20 and for replacing fiber in case of
damage (splicing repairs).
When routing fibers, make sure to observe the minimum bending radius (35
mm).
Table 2-6:
2-16
Optical fibers and mating connector data
I/O module
Interface type
Fiber type
Mating
connector
Qty./
module
MXC20
STM-1 optical
One pair of fiber

patch cords per
interface
LC male
4 fibers
MXC20
STM-4 optical
One pair of fiber

patch cords per
interface
LC male
4 fibers
MXC20
STM-1 optical
single-fiber
bidirectional
One fiber patch

cord per interface
LC male
2 fibers
SMD1
STM-1 optical
One pair of fiber

patch cords per
interface
LC male
4 fibers
SMD1H
STM-1 optical
One pair of fiber

patch cords per
interface
LC male
4 fibers
SMD1
STM-1 optical
single-fiber
bidirectional
One fiber patch

cord per interface
LC male
2 fibers
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
I/O module
Interface type
Fiber type
Mating
connector
Qty./
module
SMD1H
STM-1 optical
single-fiber
bidirectional
One fiber patch

cord per interface
LC male
2 fibers
OMS4B
STM-4 optical
One pair of fiber

patch cords per
interface
LC male
2 fibers
OMS4H
STM-4 optical
One pair of fiber

patch cords per
interface
LC male
2 fibers
MGE_1_L1
GbE optical
interface
One pair of fiber

patch cords per
interface
LC male
2 fibers
ESW_2G_8F_E
GbE optical
interface
One pair of fiber

patch cords per
interface
LC male
4 fibers
MPS_2G_8F
GbE optical
interface
One pair of fiber

patch cords per
interface
LC male
4 fibers
S1_4
STM-1 optical
One pair of fiber

patch cords per
interface
LC male
8 fibers
Work and Equipment Safety

NOTE: BG-20 equipment is intended for installation in
restricted-access areas only.
BG-20 platforms contain power sources of varying voltages. Note the
following guidelines when installing the platforms:
Before you start:
Ensure the integrity of the grounding connections.
Make sure that sufficient lighting is available.
Do not work on any equipment connected to a voltage source (DC or AC).
Ensure that the maximum working temperature does not exceed 70C.
Use only insulated tools.
Wear protective clothing as required by the requisite safety regulations.
Do not install or maintain equipment connected to external lines (for

example, E1 tributaries) during thunderstorms.
426006-2332-013-A04
2-17
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
Avoid contact with high-voltage sources when installing platforms, cards,

and modules.
Make sure you are familiar with the warning signals and labels on the
equipment and strictly observe the procedures needed to avoid the indicated
hazards.
Grounding Requirements
All the equipment, including BG-20 platforms, ancillary units, and equipment
from other vendors, must be properly grounded at all times. Good equipment
grounding is necessary to protect personnel and equipment, minimize noise,
and allow the discharge of accumulated static charges to earth.
Rack Grounding Requirements

Connect the rack to the site grounding bar with a ground cable according to
ETSI recommendations (top/bottom connection).
The rack is supplied with a main copper or brass grounding bolt welded to the
rack frame. The grounding stud is identified on the rack by the ground symbol
label.
The rack grounding bolt must be connected to the site grounding bar by a 35
mm2 (2 AWG) grounding cable or thicker, as short as possible, complying with
UL/ETSI recommendations. The bolt must be free of paint. The cable must be
made of copper strands and terminated on both sides with bolt terminals.
NOTE: If necessary, the gauge of the grounding lead can also
be reduced to the gauge of the RAP power leads.
The rack mounting rails must be free of paint and provide electrical continuity
to the main grounding bolt. The resistance between any rail and the rack main
grounding bolt must be less than 0.1 .
Pay particular attention to the area in which the RAP is attached. Remove paint
from the rack in this area to ensure efficient electrical contact.
CAUTION: Connect the RAP grounding bolt to the rack
grounding bolt with a grounding cable complying with

UL/ETSI recommendations. The cable must include bolt
terminals on both ends and be securely fastened with a nut
and a star washer.
2-18
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
Power Supply Requirements

The BG-20B, BG-20E, and BG-20C-DC shelves require two power sources
with a nominal voltage of -48 VDC. Each power source is protected by a
UL-listed circuit breaker installed in the RAP. The required circuit breakers are
included in the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment, and therefore,
their current rating is in accordance with the order.
The site operator must provide a readily accessible UL-listed disconnect device
incorporated in the fixed power wiring of the site. This device limits the
maximum delivered current to a safe value.
Table 2-7:
BG-20 -DC circuit breaker data
Shelf ID
Shelf-to-RAP
connection type
Circuit
breaker
amps
BG-20B
One cable per

INF_20B input
2A
Quantity per shelf
One cable per

INF_20E input
BG-20E
5A
Expanded set
One Y cable per
(BG-20B+BG-2 set
0E)
One cable per
INF_E2U input
BG-20HE
8A
13A
Extended set
One Y cable per
(BG-20B+BG-2 set
0HE)
Table 2-8:
16A
One for nonredundant

powering
Two for redundant powering
powering
powering
powering
BG-20C -DC circuit breaker data
Shelf ID
Shelf-to-RAP
connection type
BG-20C-DC
One cable per DC 1A

input
Circuit
breaker
amps
Quantity per shelf
426006-2332-013-A04

powering

powering
2-19
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
Laser Safety Requirements

Laser Classification
The equipment and components with laser devices described in this manual
comply with the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) safety
standards, including IEC-60825-1 - Safety of Laser Products (AS/NZS 2211.2)
and IEC-825 Safety of Optical Fiber Communication Systems.
With specific regard to the laser, BG-20 equipment complies with laser product
performance standards set by government agencies for Class 1 laser products.
The product and its accessories do not emit hazardous light, and the beam is
totally enclosed during all operating modes and maintenance.
Warning Labels for Laser Products

The following labels are affixed to the platform front panel. The labels indicate
that the product is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product, Hazard Class 1M.
Figure 2-2: Laser warning label
Laser Safety Statutory Warning

All personnel involved in equipment installation and maintenance must be
aware that laser radiation is invisible. Therefore, although protective devices
generally prevent direct exposure to the beam, personnel must strictly observe
the applicable safety precautions and in particular must avoid staring into
optical connectors, either directly or through optical instruments.
2-20
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
Laser Device Operating Precautions

In addition to the general precautions described in this section, be sure to
observe the following warnings when operating a product equipped with a laser
device. Failure to observe these warnings could result in fire, bodily injury, and
damage to the equipment.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous
radiation, note the following:
When performing maintenance and other activities on

equipment using lasers, it is recommended that you use
protection goggles for the wavelength range of 1300 nm to
1600 nm.
Only authorized personnel must carry out hot insertion or
swapping of an optical module or optical interface
module.
To prevent irremediable damage to your eyes, avoid
looking into the fiber when hot-removing and/or inserting
a fiber termination.
Place plastic covers on module fiber ports and fiber
terminations that are not currently in use.
Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform
procedures associated with the laser device other than
those specified herein.
It is strictly forbidden to interfere with any protective devices

and interlocks that are used to prevent direct exposure to the
laser beam.
Laser Information
Information regarding the various optical modules available for the BG-20
platform is provided in the following tables.
Table 2-9:
LC transceivers laser information STM-4 SFP
Module
Parameter
Data
STM-4 SFP
Laser designation
S3
L3
L5
Operating wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1550
Source type
Single mode Single

mode
Single
mode
Minimum mean launched

power (dBm)
-15
-3
-3
Maximum mean launched

power (dBm)
-8
+2
+2
426006-2332-013-A04
2-21
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
Table 2-10: LC transceivers laser information STM-1/100BaseFX SFP

Module
Parameter
Data
STM-1 SFP
Laser designation
S3
L3
L5
BD 3 17 BD 5 18
Operating
wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1550
1310
1550
Source type
Single
mode
Single
mode
Single
mode
Single
mode
Single
mode
Minimum mean
launched power (dBm)
-15
-5
-5
-14
-14
Maximum mean
launched power (dBm)
-8
-8
-8
Table 2-11: LC transceivers laser information GbE SFP (OTGBE)

Module
Parameter
Data
GbE SFP
Laser designation
SX
LX
L5
Operating
wavelength (nm)
850
1310
1550
Source type
Multi
mode
Single mode Single mode
Minimum mean launched

power (dBm)
-9.5
-11
-3
Maximum mean launched -3

power (dBm)
17
18
Single-fiber bidirectional transceivers with a transmit wavelength of 1310 nm.

Single-fiber bidirectional transceivers with a transmit wavelength of 1550 nm.
2-22
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
Protection Against Electrostatic

Discharge
This section provides guidelines regarding the protection of BG-20 equipment
and its components against electrostatic discharge (ESD) during handling,
packing/unpacking, transport, installation, commissioning, inspections,
servicing, and maintenance.
Electronic equipment, assemblies, and components that are ESDS (electrostatic
discharge sensitive) or include sensitive items are identified by the basic ESD
warning symbol shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-3: Basic ESD warning symbol
The information provided in this section is in line with CENELEC Electronic

Components Committee (CECC) specification CECC 00 015, which deals with
protection of devices sensitive to ESD.
Most types of electronic equipment, assemblies, and components can be
damaged by electrostatic discharges. An ESD between two objects occurs
when an object carrying static electrical charges touches or is brought near
another object.
Static electrical charges appear as a result of friction between surfaces of
insulating materials or separation of two such surfaces, and may also be
induced by electrical fields. Routine activities such as walking across an
insulating floor, friction between garment parts, friction between objects, and
so on, can easily build up charges to levels that may cause damage, especially
when humidity is low.
In many cases, the build-up of charge can be avoided by using special
materials, for example, garments and packaging of antistatic materials or
materials that have high resistance, but yet are not insulators.
The best way to avoid damage by ESD is a combination of means and
procedures that achieves the following goals:
Avoids build-up of electrostatic charges
Creates a protected work environment that helps prevent ESD
Provides means for controlled discharge of any accumulated electrostatic

charges when entering the protected work environment
426006-2332-013-A04
2-23
Before You Start

Maintenance Manual
NOTE: An area in which ESDS can be handled with

minimum risk of damage as a result of ESD or fields, and in
which the operator is not exposed to additional risks, is called
an ESD Protected Area (EPA).
Personnel Training
During production and assembly, equipment is handled in workspaces
especially prepared and certified to serve as a permanent EPA. However, in
many cases, the environment in which the same equipment is installed or
maintained cannot be assumed to form an EPA with a permanently controlled
boundary. Therefore, all the work involving handling of unprotected ESD must
be considered as field work.
Field work in this context includes such activities as service and maintenance,
installation, site inspections, and commissioning of components and assemblies
classified as ESDS, together with associated packing and unpacking activities.
All the staff involved in field work must be trained to perform their work in the
same way as that performed in permanent EPAs with respect to the material
quality, personal responsibilities, training, labeling, and packing.
Use of a Temporary EPA

Where necessary, use a temporary EPA. The EPA toolkit includes:
Wrist strap with 1 M series resistor
Bonding strap with 1 M series resistor
ESD carpet (work surface), 0.25 m2 minimum
The temporary EPA must include temporary controlled work surfaces and/or
flooring capable of providing protection against ESD.
CAUTION: The temporary EPA must be constructed in a way
that ensures electrical bonding of all the materials used, and
prevents the occurrence of any sudden changes in potential
within the EPA that could cause unacceptable voltages or
discharges to be applied to ESDS.
The operator and any work surface and flooring must be bonded to ground
equipotentially. For this purpose, the work surface and wrist straps must be
bonded either to a designated ground bonding point or to the equipment being
serviced.
Whenever available, the mains ground serves as the ESD grounding facility.
2-24
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start
WARNING: While the operator is within the temporary EPA,

the minimum value of resistance used for bonding to ground
must limit the current to ground, produced by voltages
accessible to the operator, to limits specified as safe by the
applicable regulations (see, for example, CECC 00 015). The
same approach is applicable to the surface resistance and
resistance to ground of materials used for temporary work
surfaces and flooring.
To enable ESD bonding to ground of equipment racks and any other
nonmoveable equipment containing ESD, an ESD ground-bonding facility
must be located near such equipment, or the equipment must be fitted with a
designated ground-bonding point presenting a resistance to ground not greater
than 1 M.
Work Arrangements within a Temporary

EPA
To ensure that effective ESD protection is indeed achieved, the following
arrangements must be observed by persons entering and/or performing field
work within a temporary EPA:
All operators working within a temporary EPA must wear, as a minimum,

an ESD antistatic protecting garment made of cotton.
If the extent of the temporary work area is such that the operator needs to
walk and move within that area, the floor of the area must be capable of
providing protection against ESD.
The operator must be bonded to ground at all times when handling ESDS.
If it becomes necessary to remove ESDS equipment and transfer it to a

temporary work surface away from the other equipment, the ESDS must be
given protective packaging unless equipotential bonding to ground of the
operator is maintained.
An ESDS unit must be placed directly into protective packaging when it is

removed from equipment. A replacement ESDS must be kept in its
protective packaging until required for immediate installation in the
equipment.
The field service operator must ensure that the materials and tools
necessary to maintain and control the temporary EPA are available at the
place of the field work at service time.
All tools for use within the EPA must, as far as is practical, be constructed
so that they do not generate or hold an induced electrostatic charge.
426006-2332-013-A04
2-25
Before You Start
2-26

Maintenance Manual
426006-2332-013-A04
3
Equipment Installation
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 3-1
Preliminary Preparations ................................................................................. 3-2
Installation Sequence ....................................................................................... 3-2
Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection ................................................. 3-5
Installation Options.......................................................................................... 3-6
Installing Ancillary Units in Racks ................................................................. 3-8
Installing the BG-20B Shelf in the Rack ....................................................... 3-31
Installing the BG-20E Shelf in the Rack ....................................................... 3-37
Installing the BG-20EH Platform in the Rack ............................................... 3-45
Installing the BG-20C Shelf in Racks ........................................................... 3-53
Connecting Fibers and Cables to the BG-20 Shelf ........................................ 3-66
Overview
This chapter provides general instructions for installing the BG-20 and
auxiliary equipment.
The procedures for equipment replacement and upgrades are similar to those
for installation, and when relevant, notes regarding live replacement or upgrade
are inserted in these procedures.
Use the information in this chapter in conjunction with specific site installation
plans in a particular customer network. If you are interested in obtaining design
or installation assistance from ECI Telecoms Customer Support team or wish
to prepare a network installation plan, contact your ECI Telecom sales
representative.
The BG-20 platforms, cards, modules, and ancillary equipment are described in
the BroadGate Product Line Reference Manual.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-1

Maintenance Manual
Preliminary Preparations
The installation procedures assume that:
The sites at which installation is to be carried out comply with the

requirements listed in Site Preparation.
The preliminary preparations specified in Before You Start have been

completed.
Before you start, determine what equipment is to be installed in the rack by

referring to the site installation plan, and note the exact position of each unit.
To avoid errors, it is recommended that you mark the prescribed positions on
the rack rails using a soft pencil.
Installation Sequence
Each component of the BG-20 system is supplied separately and must be
installed in the correct sequence according to the site plan.
A high-density installation might include the equipment illustrated in the
following figure. The different components in the illustration are described,
correlating to the steps in the following table.
NOTE: If you are not installing an FST for a particular BG-20
shelf, it is recommended that you leave empty space in the
rack in case optical modules are added in the future. If you
are not installing a BG-20E for a particular BG-20B shelf, it
is highly recommended that you leave enough empty space
above the BG-20B shelf in the rack in case a BG-20E shelf is
added in the future.
CAUTION:
3-2
If additional equipment is used in the rack, a heat buffer or

a buffer plate must be installed between any such
additional equipment and the BG-20 shelf to minimize the
transfer of heat from shelf to shelf. This heat buffer must
be purchased from ECI Telecom.
During the installation of equipment in the rack, make
sure all the optical connectors are closed by protective
caps. Do not remove the cap until an optical fiber is
connected to the corresponding connector.
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
For illustrations of installation options, see Installation Options (page 3-6).
Figure 3-1: Typical installation of a single BG-20B shelf in a 2200 ETSI rack
NOTE: The FST should be installed below the BG-20B. If

the BG-20E is not installed, space above the BG-20B should
be reserved for the BG-20E.
The general stages described in the following table, listed in the required order
of execution.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-3
Table 3-1:
Step

Maintenance Manual
Outline of typical BG-20B equipment installation sequence
Procedure
Install a rack (if required)
Unpack and perform a visual inspection
Install ancillary equipment in the rack, including:

RAP unit
FST (optional)
Optional ODF units
Optional DDF units
Optional SM_10E ICP units
3-4
Install the BG-20B shelf in the rack
Install the Dslot modules in the BG-20B shelf (if required)
Install the SFP modules in the BG-20B shelf (for MXC20 and
SMD1/OMS4B)
Install the BG-20E shelf in the rack (if required)
Install the power module in the BG-20E shelf
Install extension cards in the BG-20E shelf
10
Install the BG-OW in the rack (if required)
11
Route and connect all cables and fibers, including:

Power and alarm cables
Optical fibers to optical modules transceivers
Traffic cables to electrical cards
Data cables
Timing cables
Management cable
Orderwire cable
PCM interface cables
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Unpacking and Performing

Visual Inspection
Before you start:
Before unpacking, make a preliminary inspection of the shipping boxes.
Immediately report evidence of damage to the carrier, the project manager, and
your local ECI Telecom representative.
CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices
Proper handling and grounding precautions required
BG-20 equipment contains components sensitive to ESD. To
prevent ESD damage, strictly observe all the precautions
listed in Protection Against Electronic Discharge (page 2-23).
Keep parts and cards in their antistatic packaging material
until you are ready to install them.
The use of an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded
equipment frame or rack is recommended when handling
cards and modules during installation, removal, or connection
to internal connectors.
Unpack the equipment on a clean flat surface.

To unpack the equipment:
1. Place the shipping boxes with the top upwards, cut the sealing tape using a
short knife so as not to damage the internal items, and open the top flaps.
2. Remove the items contained in the box and inspect each one for damage.
Check for loose parts or any visual damage to the rack, platform, and
auxiliary equipment. Also check the integrity of all the connectors, leads,
and cables.
NOTE: Do not remove plastic covers from optical connectors
until optical cables are connected to them.
3. Search the shipping boxes for any additional small items that may be
present.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-5

Maintenance Manual
4. Open each of the module and card packages for inspection, but do not
remove the modules/cards from their individual protective packages until
they can be inserted in the platform.
5. Check the contents of the shipping boxes against the packing list attached
to each box. If damaged parts are detected or if any parts are missing,
notify the project manager and your local ECI Telecom representative
immediately.
Installation Options
It is recommended that BG-20 shelves be installed in ECI Telecom
recommended racks. These racks can be installed on wooden, concrete, or
suspended floors, or suspended from overhead mountings.
The following racks are supported:
Standard 19 rack
Standard ETSI
Open frame
NOTE: BG-20 shelves can also be installed in standard street
cabinets. Consult ECI Telecom for more details.
By default, the BG-20 is shipped with 19 mounting brackets.
If you are installing in an ETSI rack, ETSI brackets must be
ordered separately and replaced in the field.
3-6
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
You can install up to eight BG-20B shelves in a rack, or you can install up to
four BG-20 shelves (with the BG-20E) in a rack. Typical installation of four
BG-20 shelves with the BG-20E in an ETSI 2200 rack is shown in the
following figure.
Figure 3-2: Typical installation of four BG-20 shelves
If necessary, contact the ECI Telecom Customer Support team or your ECI
Telecom sales representative for help in meeting your specific installation
requirements.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-7

Maintenance Manual
Installing Ancillary Units in

Racks
ECI Telecom offers various accessories for efficient and optimal installation in
racks. Contact ECI Telecoms Customer Support team or your ECI Telecom
sales representative for additional items or custom modifications to standard
items.
The specific units you need to install depend on your site installation plan and
may include one or more of the following:
RAP unit: For connecting up to four or eight BG-20 platforms (BG-20 with
BG-20E is counted as two platforms) on the same rack, usually located at
the top. See Installing the RAP-BG (page 3-9) and Installing the RAP-4B
(page 3-15).
FST: Located under the BG-20B platform, recommended for installations

with a large number of optical modules. See Installing the Fiber Storage
Tray (see "Installing the FST" page 3-22).
ODF units: See Installing the ODF (page 3-24).
xDDF-21: This unit must be installed for unbalanced E1 interfaces. See

Installing the xDDF-21 Patch Panel (page 3-27).
ICP_MPC30: This unit is used to distribute the concentrated Auxiliary

connector on the MCP30B panel into dedicated connectors for each
function. See Installing the ICP_MCP30 (page 3-28).
AC_CONV_UNIT: This unit is an AC power platform that can be mounted

separately on the rack. See Installing the AC_CONV_UNIT (page 3-30).
In general, ancillary units are attached to the rack side rails by four M6 Phillips
screws. No preparation is required before installation. The following sections
provide mechanical installation instructions for units that require additional
procedures. Skip sections that are not relevant to your particular application.
CAUTION: If additional equipment (other than BG-20
platforms) is installed in the rack, a heat buffer must be

installed between such equipment and the BG-20 to minimize
the transfer of heat from platform to platform. Consult your
ECI Telecom representative regarding the exact heat buffer
required.
3-8
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing the RAP-BG

Before You Start:
Before connecting DC power cables, see DC Power Cables.
For a description of the RAP-BG, see the BroadGate Product Line Reference
Manual.
To install the RAP-BG:
1. Prepare DC power cables.
2. Install the RAP-BG in the prescribed location.
3. Ground the RAP-BG to the rack grounding stud.
4. Connect input DC power cables to the RAP-BG.
5. Connect the DC power cables of the BroadGate platforms to the RAP-BG.
6. Install circuit breakers.
7. Check power wiring.
Preparing DC Input Power Cables

NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for
connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) must be

connected with a red cable and the negative lead (-48 V) with
a black cable. However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and
HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead must be
connected with a blue cable and the negative lead with a gray
cable. In the following sections that describe DC power cable
connections, use cables of appropriate colors to comply with
the standards in your area of residence.
The DC input power cables connect the two DC power sources and the
RAP-BG source A and source B inputs. Two cables are required, one for each
source. Each cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of
50 mm2 (.078 in.2), one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a
compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment.
NOTE: When the RAP-BG provides power to a single
BroadGate platform, lower gauge cables can be used. See DC
Power Cables for DC power cable requirements.
CAUTION: If appropriate leads have already been prepared
at the prescribed rack location, make sure that the leads are
not connected to any live voltage source before attaching the
lugs.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-9

Maintenance Manual
To prepare a DC power cable:

1. Strip about 22 mm (1 in.) of the red lead jacket.
2. Insert all lead strands into the lug sleeve.
3. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate
crimping tool and die. The recommended tools are Panduit CT-720
crimping tool with CD-720-2 die, Klauke K18 crimping tool with D50 die,
or equivalent.
It is recommended to use insulation tape (of the same color as the lead
jacket) between the cable lug and the cable itself.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 above for the black lead.
Installing the RAP-BG

The RAP-BG is attached to the rack side rails at the top position of the rack.
Attach the RAP-BG to the side rails and secure it with the four screws,
washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.
To ground the RAP-BG:

1. The RAP-BG grounding stud is located on its rear cover, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 3-3: Location of RAP-BG grounding stud
2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead in accordance with the requirements

described in Grounding Requirements (page 2-18).
3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the RAP-BG grounding
stud, using a spring washer and nut.
4. Connect the lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the rack
grounding stud.
3-10
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
To connect DC input power cables to the RAP-BG:

1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the
RAP-BG by referring to the following figure.
Figure 3-4: Identification of RAP-BG cable routes
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-BG front cover and remove
the cover.
3. Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board
by referring to the following figure (showing the terminals at source A side;
a similar board is used at source B side).
Figure 3-5: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-BG
426006-2332-013-A04
3-11

Maintenance Manual
CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to

identify the terminal polarity on the RAP-BG power terminal
board.
4. Bring the two leads of DC source A input power cable to the appropriate
RAP-BG opening.
5. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminal marked (+) on
the power terminal board (see the previous figure).
6. Secure the lug using a flat washer, spring washer, and nut. Tighten the nut
with a torque of 1450 N cm to 1600 N cm.
7. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on
8. Repeat Step 6 for the black lead lug.
9. If an additional power source (source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for
source B.
10. Securely attach the DC input power cables to the rack inner wall using
cable ties.
During the following procedure, refer to the figures in Connecting DC power
cables to the RAP-BG (page 3-11).
To connect the DC power cables to a platform:
RAP-BG.
2. Insert the DC power cable end, terminated with lugs, of the BG-20 platform
through the opening for platform power cables connecting to source A. If
more platforms are installed in the rack, start by connecting the Platform 1
cable.
3. Attach the red lead lug of the platform power cable to the positive stud
terminal of Platform 1 on the power terminal board.
5. Attach the black lead lug of the power cable to the negative stud terminal of
Platform 1 on the power terminal board.
3-12
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual

7. Identify the platform's grounding terminals located on the inner side panel
of the RAP-BG as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-6: RAP-BG platform power cable grounding screws
8. Attach the grounding (shield) lead lug of the platform power cable to the
ground stud terminal located on the RAP-BG side panel.
9. Repeat Step 4 for the grounding lead lug.
10. If additional BG-20 platforms are installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2 to 9
for each platform power cable.
11. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 10 to connect the
platforms to source B.
12. Route each platform power cable along the rack side rails down to the
corresponding platform position, and then securely attach the power cable
to the rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector
in accordance with its function.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-13

Maintenance Manual
To install the RAP-BG circuit breakers:

1. If the RAP-BG front panel has not been removed, open the two captive
screws fastening it to the RAP-BG chassis and remove the cover.
Figure 3-7: RAP-BG front cover removal
2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to the power circuit A of Shelf 1

(the circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the
equipment; its rating is in accordance with the ordered platform
configuration).
Figure 3-8: RAP-BG circuit breaker installation
3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the
RAP-BG source A power terminal board, as shown in the previous figure.
4. If more platforms are powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert
the circuit breakers into the corresponding platform positions of the power
terminal board.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 4 for source B
circuit breakers.
3-14
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
To check DC voltage polarity:

1. Make sure the correct site grounding test has been passed successfully (see
Grounding Requirements (page 2-18)).
2. Connect the DC input power to the RAP-BG.
3. Set all the RAP-BG circuit breakers to ON.
4. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to test the voltage between the positive
and negative contacts of each power cable.
The following figure identifies the functions of the power cable connector
contacts assembled on the cable end connected to the BG-20 platform, as
seen when looking into the connector.
Figure 3-9: Platform DC input power connector pin functions
5. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 VDC to -72 VDC),
and that it has the correct polarity.
6. Return all the RAP-BG circuit breakers to OFF.
7. Disconnect the RAP-BG input power sources.
8. Reinstall the RAP-BG front cover and fasten it using the two captive
screws.
Installing the RAP-4B

Before You Start:
Before connecting DC power cables, see DC Power Cables.
For a description of the RAP-4B, see 9200 series Reference Manual.
To install the RAP-4B:
1. Prepare DC power cables.
2. Install the RAP-4B in the prescribed location.
3. Ground the RAP-4B to the rack grounding stud.
4. Connect input DC power cables to the RAP-4B.
5. Connect the DC power cables of the BroadGate platforms to the RAP-4B.
6. Install circuit breakers.
7. Check power wiring.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-15

Maintenance Manual
Preparing DC Input Power Cables

NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for
connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) must be

connected with a red cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with
a black cable. However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and
HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead must be
connected with a blue cable and the negative lead with a gray
cable. In the following sections use cables of the colors to
comply with the standards in your area of residence.
The DC input power cables connect the two DC power sources and the
RAP-4B source A and source B inputs. Two cables are required, one for each
source. Each cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of
50 mm2 (0.078 in.2), one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a
compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment.
NOTE: When the RAP-4B provides power to a single
BroadGate platform, lower gauge cables may be used. See
DC Power Cables for DC power cable requirements.
CAUTION: If appropriate leads have already been prepared
at the prescribed rack location, make sure that the leads are
not connected to any live voltage source before attaching the
lugs.
To prepare a DC power cable:

1. Strip about 22 mm (1 in.) of the red lead jacket.
2. Insert all lead strands into the lug sleeve.
3. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate
crimping tool and die. The recommended tools are Panduit CT-720
crimping tool with CD-720-2 die, Klauke K18 crimping tool with D50 die,
or equivalent.
It is recommended to use insulation tape (of the same color as the lead
jacket) between the cable lug and the cable itself.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the black lead.
3-16
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing the RAP-4B

The RAP-4B is attached to the rack side rails at the top of the rack.
To install the RAP-4B:
Attach the RAP-4B to the side rails and secure it with the four screws,
washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.
To ground the RAP-4B:

NOTE: The RAP-4B is supplied, by default, with a grounding
cable connected to the rear of the unit. Use this cable to
connect ground to the RAP-4B.
1. The RAP-4B grounding studs are located on its rear cover as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 3-10: Locating RAP-4B grounding stud
If a grounding cable is already attached to the RAP-4B, skip Steps 2 and 3.

2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead (with a two-hole lug) as details
described in Grounding Requirements.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-17

Maintenance Manual
3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the RAP-4B grounding
studs, using spring washers and nuts.
Figure 3-11: RAP-4B with grounding cable
4. Connect the two-hole lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the
rack's grounding bar.
To connect DC input power cables to the RAP-4B:
RAP-4B, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-12: Identifying RAP-4B cable routes
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-4B front cover and remove
it.
3-18
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
3. Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board,
as shown in the following figure (showing source A side; a similar board is
used at source B side).
Figure 3-13: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-4B
CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to

identify the terminal polarity on the RAP-4B power terminal
board.
4. Bring the two leads of one DC source A input power cable to the
appropriate RAP-4B opening.
5. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminal marked (+) on
7. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on
9. If an additional power source (source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for
source B.
10. Securely attach the DC input power cables to the rack inner wall using
cable ties.
During the following procedure, refer to the figure Connecting DC power
cables to the RAP-4B (page 3-19).
426006-2332-013-A04
3-19

Maintenance Manual
To connect the DC power cable to a platform:

RAP-4B.
2. Insert the DC power cable end terminated in lugs of the BG-20 platform
through the opening for power cables connecting to source A. If more
platforms are installed in the rack, start by connecting the Platform 1 cable.
3. Attach the red lead lug of the platform power cable to the positive stud
terminal of Platform 1 on the power terminal board.
4. Secure the lug using a flat washer, spring washer, and M6 screw. Tighten
the M6 screw with a torque of 320 N cm to 350 N cm.
5. Attach the black lead lug of the power cable to the negative stud terminal of
Platform 1 on the power terminal board.
7. Identify the platforms grounding terminals located on the inner side panel
of the RAP-4B according to the following figure.
Figure 3-14: RAP-4B platform power cable grounding screws
8. Attach the grounding (shield) lead lug of the platform power cable to the
ground stud terminal located on the RAP-4B side panel.
9. Repeat Step 4 for the grounding lead lug.
10. If more BG-20 platforms are installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2 to 9 for
each platform power cable.
11. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 10 to connect the
platforms to source B.
12. Route each platform power cable along the rack side rails down to its
corresponding platform, and then securely attach the power cable to the
rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in
accordance with its function.
3-20
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
To install the RAP-4B circuit breakers:

1. If the RAP-4B front panel has not been removed, open the two captive
screws fastening it to the chassis and remove the cover.
Figure 3-15: RAP-4B front cover removal
2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to power circuit A of Platform 1

(the circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the
equipment platform; its rating is in accordance with the ordered platform
configuration).
Figure 3-16: RAP-4B circuit breaker installation
3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the
RAP-4B source A power terminal board, as shown in the previous figure.
4. If more platforms are powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert
the circuit breakers into the corresponding platform positions of the power
terminal board.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 4 above for source
B circuit breakers.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-21

Maintenance Manual
Checking DC Voltage Polarity

To check DC voltage polarity:
1. Make sure the correct site grounding test has been passed successfully (see
Grounding Requirements).
2. Connect the DC input power to the RAP-4B.
3. Set all the RAP-4B circuit breakers to ON.
4. Use a DMM to test the voltage between the positive and negative contacts
of each power cable.
The following figure identifies the functions of the power cable connector
contacts assembled on the cable end connected to the BG-20 platform, as
Figure 3-17: Platform DC input power connector pin functions
5. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 VDC to -72 VDC),
and that it has the correct polarity.
6. Return all the RAP-4B circuit breakers to OFF.
7. Disconnect the RAP-4B input power sources.
8. Reinstall the RAP-4B front cover and fasten it with the two captive screws.
Installing the FST

Install the FST 50 mm below the fiber guide. If additional equipment is
installed below it, such as another BG-20 platform, an additional 50 mm must
be left free between the FST and such equipment.
To install the FST in the rack:
1. Attach the FST to the rack rails and secure it using the four supplied
screws, washers, and nuts.
2. Prepare the necessary fibers according to the site cabling diagram and the
detailed cabling diagrams or tables of each platform. See the safety
information in Work and Equipment Safety (page 2-17) and Power Supply
Requirements (page 2-19).
3. Label the cables in accordance with the cabling diagrams or tables.
3-22
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
4. Thread the optical fibers into the conduits running along the front supports
of the ETSI A rack, (or the rack sidewalls in an ETSI B rack).
5. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to release the latch, and pull
the FST towards you to open it.
NOTE: The FST has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. Pull it again to open it
fully so that you can thread the fibers.
6. Thread the fibers into the FST, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-18: Threading optical fibers in the FST
NOTE: All optical fibers should be arranged in groups inside

the FST and fastened with Velcro strips.
7. Run the fibers up to the level of the corresponding optical connector.
8. Return the FST to the rack until it latches in place with a click.
CAUTION: Make sure that all the optical connectors are
closed at all times with the appropriate protective caps or with

the mating cable connector. Do not remove the protective cap
until an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding
connector, and immediately install a protective cap after a
cable is disconnected.
The minimum bending radius of optical fibers is 35 mm.
Sharp bending of fibers may degrade the optical transmission
characteristics.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-23

Maintenance Manual
Installing the ODF

Identify the prescribed ODF locations in the rack before performing the
following procedures.
The ODF is supplied with two sets of rack mounting brackets: one for 19 and
ETSI racks (for both ETSI A and B), and the other for 23 7-foot bay racks.
To attach the rack mounting brackets to the ODF:
Refer to the following figure to identify the required set of rack mounting
brackets, and attach each bracket to the corresponding ODF side panel with
three screws.
Figure 3-19: Attaching rack mounting brackets to the ODF
3-24
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
To connect optical fibers to the ODF:

1. Push the release button on the ODF front panel to the left to release the
latch and pull it towards you. The cover opens downwards.
Figure 3-20: ODF front panel
Figure 3-21: ODF open view
2. Hold the end of the swing-out tray and pull it out to gain access to the ODF
components.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-25

Maintenance Manual
3. Open the two cover thumb nuts and remove the protective cover from the
ODF splice support.
4. Insert the external fibers cable through the protective tube.
Figure 3-22: ODF fiber routes
5. Route the fiber ends through the cable guides to the splice support area.
6. Identify the adapter panel pigtail to be spliced to each user fiber.
7. Insert splicing sleeves over the pigtail, splice the user fiber to the pigtail,
and slide the splicing sleeve over the splice.
8. Place the splicing sleeve in one of the slots in the splice support.
NOTE: When more than 12 fibers are connected to the ODF,
start by first filling the slots of the lower splice support. After
those slots are occupied, reinstall the top splice support and
continue filling the support slots.
9. After splicing all the fibers, reinstall the protective cover removed in Step
3.
10. Push the swing-out tray back into the unit.
11. Close the ODF front cover by pushing it up until it clicks to the unit.
12. See the To attach the rack mounting brackets to the ODF procedure,
above, and secure the user fibers with cable ties to the fiber fastening
bracket at the rear of the ODF.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to fibers, do not tighten the
cable ties.
3-26
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
To install ODF units in a rack:
Install each ODF in the prescribed rack position and fasten it to the rack
side rails with four screws.
Installing the xDDF-21 Patch Panel

The BG-20 only supports balanced E1s directly. For unbalanced E1s, install the
xDDF-21 that provides balanced-to-unbalanced conversion for 21 E1s. The
number of xDDF-21 units to be installed with one BG-20B unit is based on the
number of PME1_21 modules (for the number of unbalanced E1s required).
To install an xDDF-21 patch panel:
1. Route the 100-pin SCSI cables leading from the E1 interfaces on the
PME1_21 panel along the side of the rack to the location where the
xDDF-21 patch panel is to be installed.
2. Before you install the patch panel, connect the SCSI cables leading to the
rear of the xDDF-21 patch panel. The cables are marked J1 and J2 and must
be connected to their respective connectors.
3. Attach the patch panel to the rack rails and secure using the four supplied
screws, washers, and nuts.
4. Connect the traffic cables to the front of the xDDF-21 patch panel, and
make a note of the appropriate channels on the identification label on the
inside of the panel door.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-27

Maintenance Manual
Installing the ICP_MCP30

To distribute the concentrated Auxiliary connector on the MCP30B panel into
dedicated connectors for each function, an MCP30B interconnection panel
(ICP) was developed. It is connected to the MCP30B module through a
back-to-back cable with 36-pin SCSI connectors on both sides. The
ICP_MCP30 can be installed anywhere in the rack.
To install an ICP_MCP30:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the ICP_MCP30 in the rack in
accordance with the rack installation plan.
2. Place the ICP_MCP30 in the prescribed position using the two stabilizing
pins to hold it temporarily in place, and then fasten the platform to the rack
side rails with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.
Figure 3-23: Installing ICP_MCP30 in the rack
3-28
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing SM_10E ICPs

Three types of ICPs were developed to simplify installation and connection to
customer termination equipment. The ICP is connected to the SM_10E module
using a special cable that spreads the condensed cable to connector types
commonly used for each service. Each ICP can serve one SM_10E traffic
module. An ICP can be installed anywhere in the rack.
To install an SM_10E ICP:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the ICP in the rack in accordance with
the rack installation plan.
2. Place the ICP in the prescribed position using the two stabilizing pins to
hold it temporarily in place, and then fasten the platform to the rack side
rails with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.
Figure 3-24: Installing SM_10E ICPs in the rack
426006-2332-013-A04
3-29

Maintenance Manual
Installing the AC_CONV_UNIT

The AC_CONV_UNIT is an AC power platform that can be mounted
separately in the rack. The AC_CONV_UNIT is supplied with one set of
combined rack mounting brackets for 19 and ETSI racks (for both ETSI A and
B racks).
To install an AC_CONV_UNIT:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the AC_CONV_UNIT in the rack in
2. Place the AC_CONV_UNIT in the prescribed position using the two
stabilizing pins to hold it temporarily in place, and then fasten the platform
to the rack side rails with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.
Figure 3-25: Installing the AC_CONV_UNIT in the rack
3-30
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-20B Shelf in

the Rack
Each BG-20B shelf is supplied with an installed power module and an empty
Dslot (covered by a blank panel). Therefore, the installation activities covered
in this section include:
Installing the Rail Stiffeners (page 3-31)
Attaching the BG-20B Shelf in the Rack (page 3-32)
Grounding the BG-20B Shelf (page 3-33)
After the activities presented in this section have been completed, the BG-20B
shelf is ready for:
Installing Power Modules in the BG-20B (page 3-33)
Installing Dslot Modules (page 3-34)
Installing SFP Modules (page 3-35)
Installing the Rail Stiffeners

If you install the BG-20B in the rack without installing rail stiffeners, the rear
side of the BG-20B shelf will be slightly lower than the front side, due to the
weight of the BG-20B shelf. This makes installation of the BG-20E very
difficult. The rail stiffeners make the BG-20B level after it is installed in the
rack. Two rail stiffeners are shipped along with the BG-20B shelf.
CAUTION: Currently, to install the BG-20E on the BG-20B,
rack stiffeners must be installed.
To install the rack stiffeners:

1. Locate the two rail stiffeners included as part of the BG-20B shelf package.
2. Determine the position for the rail stiffener on the racks left side rail,
according to the position of the BG-20B shelf in the rack, and in
3. Place the rail stiffener on the rear side of the racks left side rail.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-31

Maintenance Manual
4. Fasten the rail stiffener to the racks left side rail with two M6 screws and
washers through the uppermost and lowermost holes of the rail stiffener.
5. Repeat Steps 2 to 4 to install the second rail stiffener on the racks right
side rail.
Figure 3-26: Installing the rail stiffeners in the rack
Attaching the BG-20B Shelf in the Rack

WARNING: Before starting, make sure that the DC power is
not connected to the rack, and that the circuit breakers in the
RAP, if used, are set to OFF.
Before you start:

Review the grounding requirements specified in Before You Start (page 2-1).
Obtain the required materials and make sure to perform the grounding
connections in accordance with these requirements.
To attach a BG-20B shelf to an ECI Telecom recommended
rack:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the BG-20B shelf in the rack in
2. Place the BG-20B shelf in the prescribed position using the two stabilizing
pins to hold it temporarily in place, and then fasten the shelf to the rack side
rails (to the second and third lowest screws in the rail stiffeners) with four
M6 screws and washers.
3-32
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Grounding the BG-20B Shelf

Before you start:
Review the grounding requirements specified in Preparing Cables and

Fibers (page 2-10). Obtain the required materials and make sure to perform
the grounding connections in accordance with these requirements.
To ground the BG-20B shelf:
BG-20B shelf grounding is achieved by connecting the shelf to the rack

using rack mounting brackets. Grounding is provided by contact when the
unit is fastened to the rack.
Installing Power Modules in the BG-20B

Each BG-20B shelf must have a power module installed in the power module
slot. Either the INF_20B (for a DC power supply) or AC_CONV_20B (for an
AC power supply) can be configured according to the site installation plan.
The BG-20B is always shipped with a power module installed. The procedure
described in this section is therefore only relevant when you want to replace the
power module.
Figure 3-27: Installing a power module in the BG-20B
426006-2332-013-A04
3-33

Maintenance Manual
To install a power module:

1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment,
and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.
3. Insert the rear end of the power module into the card guides.
4. Push the module in until the panel at the front of the module is flush with
the front of the BG-20B shelf. If resistance is felt before the connectors are
flush, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.
5. Secure the module in place by tightening its two captive screws.
Installing Dslot Modules

This section describes the installation process for Dslot modules. For a list of
available Dslot modules and their technical descriptions, refer to the BroadGate
Product Line Reference Manual.
The BG-20B is shipped with the Dslot covered by a blank panel. You will have
to remove this cover to install a module in it.
To install a Dslot module in the BG-20B shelf:
The Dslot module can be installed in the Dslot of the BG-20B shelf as per the
site installation plan.
Figure 3-28: Installing a Dslot module in the BG-20B
1. Loosen the two screws on the Dslot cover panel and remove it.
2. Check that the Dslot module has not been physically damaged during
shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is
sealed.
3-34
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
3. Remove the Dslot module from its antistatic protection packaging and
perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any
problems.
4. Hold the Dslot module handle and insert the rear end of the module into the
module guides.
5. Push the module in until the front of the module is flush with the front of
the BG-20B shelf. If resistance is felt, pull the module out and repeat the
procedure.
6. Secure the module in place by fastening its two captive screws.
NOTE: Dslot modules do not support hot insertion. Make
sure the BG-20B is powered off before installing any Dslot
module.
Installing SFP Modules

All BG-20B shelves and SMD1/OSM4B, SMD1H/OSM4BH modules are
shipped without SFP modules installed. Proper SFP modules must be installed
in the field according to the field installation plan.
ECI Telecom supplies field-replaceable SFP transceivers in all optical
interfaces and electrical STM-1 interfaces. Hot swapping is allowed, provided
you observe all the safety precautions described in Before You Start (page 2-1)
during the replacement.
NOTE: Only SFP modules supplied by ECI Telecom can be
used in the BG-20. Otherwise, the laser in SFP module will
always shut down.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-35

Maintenance Manual
Figure 3-29: Installing an SFP module in the BG-20B
To install an SFP module:

1. Check that the SFP has not been physically damaged during shipment, and
that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
3. Insert the rear end of the SFP module plug-in into the prescribed position,
and push slowly backward to mate its rear connector with the
corresponding optical interface module connector until the transceiver
clicks into place. If you feel resistance before the transceiver plug-in is
fully inserted, retract the transceiver and repeat the insertion.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for other SFP modules (if required).
3-36
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-20E Shelf in

the Rack
A very important differentiator of the BG-20 is that it consists of BG-20B and
BG-20E shelves, thus providing a better pay-as-you-grow solution. The
BG-20B can cover a large percentage of applications. For more add-drop
capacity and additional functionality, such as Ethernet L2 and PCM, a BG-20E
can be added to the BG-20B. The BG-20E supports live insertion, and can be
installed at any time without affecting the traffic running on the BG-20B. The
BG-20E can also be installed when installing the BG-20B.
Each BG-20E shelf is supplied with a power module slot and extension slots.
All extension slots are initially empty. The three extension slots are covered by
a cover panel.
The installation activities covered in this section include:
Installing the BG-20E on the BG-20B (page 3-37)
After the activities presented in this section have been completed, the BG-20E
shelf is ready for:
Installing Power Modules in the BG-20E (page 3-41)
Installing Extension Cards in the BG-20E (page 3-42)
Installing SFP Modules in the ESW_2G_8F_E, MPS_2G_8F, or S1_4

Cards (page 3-43)
Installing Traffic Modules in the SM_10E (page 3-44)
Installing the BG-20E on the BG-20B

To install the BG-20E on the BG-20B, a BG-20E installation kit is needed. The
BG-20E installation kit is shipped as part of the BG-20E shelf package. The kit
includes the ASSEMBLE THE BG-20E TO BG-20 ASSY (DWG NO.
3HETC6-3033-0000-68) drawing, which describes the installation process in
detail. Be sure to follow this drawing closely during BG-20E installation. The
following procedure is a high-level summary of the installation process.
WARNING: Before starting to install the BG-20E, make sure
that the DC power cable is not connected to the BG-20E, and
that the circuit breakers in the RAP, if used, are set to OFF.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-37

Maintenance Manual
CAUTION: Before adding the BG-20E shelf to the BG-20B,

ensure that the rail stiffeners have been installed. Without the
rail stiffeners, it will be very difficult to install the BG-20E. If
the rail stiffeners are not installed, it is highly recommended
that you first remove the BG-20B from the rack and then
install the rails stiffeners before proceeding with the BG-20E
installation. For more details, see Installing the Rail Stiffeners
(page 3-31).
WARNING: Great care should be taken when installing the
BG-20E in order to avoid damage to the BG-20B or BG-20E.
Be sure to follow the drawing provided in the BG-20E
installation kit.
To install the BG-20E on the BG-20B:
Figure 3-30: Installing the BG-20E on the BG-20B
1. Locate the BG-20E installation kit in the BG-20E shelf package.

2. Remove the cover plate on the BG-20B top cover by releasing the two
screws.
3. Assemble the MiniBP into the connector in the rear-right area of BG-20B.
Secure the MiniBP in place by tightening the screw with a screwdriver.
Verity that the connectors on the MiniBP and in the BG-20B are fully
mated.
4. Manually insert two pin guides into the top cover of the BG-20B.
5. Assemble the BG-20E on the BG-20B, with the help of the two pin guides.
Verity that the connectors on the MiniBP and in the BG-20E are fully
mated.
3-38
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
6. Insert three rivet snaps into the holes on the bottom of the BG-20E to attach
the BG-20E to the BG-20B. Verity that the caps of the rivets are flat on the
bottom of the BG-20E.
7. Fasten the BG-20E to the rack side rails (to the screws in the rail stiffeners)
with four M6 screws and washers. BG-20E shelf grounding is achieved by
connecting the shelf to the rack using rack mounting brackets. Grounding is
provided by contact when the unit is fastened to the rack.
Disassembling the BG-20E from the BG-20B

The following is the correct way to disassemble the BG-20E from the BG-20B
platform. The BG-20E is attached to the BG-20B with six snap rivets; you must
first remove these rivets before removing the BG-20E. It is recommended to
use a thin flat tool (like a screwdriver) to raise the rivet caps first, and then
remove them.
Figure 3-31: Removing the BG-20E from the BG-20B
426006-2332-013-A04
3-39

Maintenance Manual
To disassemble the BG-20E from the BG-20B:

1. Insert a thin flat-head screwdriver under the rivet cap.
Figure 3-32: Inserting the thin flat-head tool
2. Raise the rivet cap by the screwdriver.
Figure 3-33: Raising the rivet cap
3. Remove the rivet with your hand.
Figure 3-34: Removing the rivet
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to remove the other rivets.

5. Raise the BG-20E from the BG-20B and remove it.
6. Disassemble the pin guides and the MiniBP from the BG-20B.
3-40
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing Power Modules in the BG-20E

Each BG-20E shelf must have a power module installed in the power module
slot. Either the INF_20E (for a DC power supply) or AC_CONV_20E (for an
AC power supply) can be configured according to the site installation plan. The
BG-20E is always shipped with the power module slot empty.
Figure 3-35: Installing the power module in the BG-20E
To install the power module on the BG-20E:

the front of the BG-20E shelf. If resistance is felt before the connectors are
flush, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-41

Maintenance Manual
Installing Extension Cards in the BG-20E

This section describes how to install extension cards. For a list of available
extension cards and their technical descriptions, refer to the BroadGate Product
Line Reference Manual.
The BG-20E is shipped with its Eslots covered by blank panels. You should
remove the corresponding cover to install an extension card.
CAUTION: When installing a MPoE_12G card the total PoE
power budget is up to 50 W.
To install an extension card in the BG-20E shelf:

Extension cards are installed in the Eslots of the BG-20E shelf in accordance
with the site installation plan.
Figure 3-36: Installing an extension card in the BG-20E
1. Identify the Eslot in which you want to install the extension card, according
to the site installation plan.
2. Loosen the two screws on the Eslot cover and remove it.
3. Check that the extension card has not been physically damaged during
sealed.
4. Remove the extension card from its antistatic protection packaging and
problems.
5. Hold the extension card handles and insert its rear end into the card guides.
3-42
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
6. Push the extension card in until the front of the card is flush with the front
of the BG-20E shelf. If resistance is felt, pull the card out and repeat the
procedure.
7. Secure the card in place by fastening its two captive screws.
NOTE: Extension cards support live insertion. They can be
installed at any time without affecting the existing traffic
running on the BG-20B or BG-20E.
Installing SFP Modules in the

ESW_2G_8F_E, MPS_2G_8F, or S1_4 Cards
All ESW_2G_8F_E and MPS_2G_8F cards are shipped without SFP modules
installed for GbE interfaces. If a GbE interface is needed, the proper SFP
module must be installed in the field according to the field installation plan.
All S1_4 cards are shipped without SFP modules installed for STM-1
interfaces. If an STM-1 interface is needed, the proper SFP module must be
installed in the field according to the field installation plan.
ECI Telecom supplies field-replaceable SFP transceivers for GbE and STM-1
interfaces. Hot swapping is allowed, provided you observe all the safety
precautions described in Before You Start (page 2-1) during the replacement.
NOTE: Only SFP modules supplied by ECI Telecom can be
used in the ESW_2G_8F_E, MPS_2G_8F, and S1_4 cards.
Otherwise, the laser in the SFP module always shuts down.
To install an SFP transceiver in the ESW_2G_8F_E,

MPS_2G_8F, or S1_4 cards:
Use the same procedure as described in Installing SFP Modules (page 3-35)
to install an SFP transceiver in the ESW_2G_8F_E, MPS_2G_8F, or S1_4
cards.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-43

Maintenance Manual
Installing Traffic Modules in the SM_10E

The SM_10E consists of a base card and up to three traffic modules. This
section describes the installation procedure for traffic modules in the SM_10E.
For a list of available traffic modules and their technical descriptions, refer to
the BroadGate Product Line Reference Manual.
The SM_10E card is supplied with traffic module slots covered by blank
panels. You should remove the corresponding cover to install a traffic module.
To install a traffic module in the SM_10E card:
The traffic module can be installed in the traffic module slot of the SM_10E
card, as per the site installation plan.
Figure 3-37: Installing a traffic module on the SM_10E
1. Loosen the two screws on the traffic slot cover and remove it.
2. Check that the traffic module has not been physically damaged during
sealed.
3. Remove the traffic module from its antistatic protection packaging and
problems.
4. Hold the traffic module handle and insert its rear end into the module
guides.
5. Push the module in until the front of the module is flush with the front of
the SM_10E base card. If resistance is felt, pull the module out and repeat
the procedure.
6. Secure the module in place by fastening its two captive screws.
NOTE: SM_10E modules support live insertion. They can be
running on the BG-20B or BG-20E, including the SM_10E.
3-44
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-20EH Platform

in the Rack
BG-20EH is a expansion unit which can be added on top of the BG-20B to
provide enhanced capacity and a rich feature list. If you need more add-drop
capacity and additional functionality, such as Ethernet L2 and PCM, a
BG-20EH can be added. The BG-20EH supports live insertion and can be
installed at any time without affecting the traffic running on the BG-20B. The
BG-20EH can also be installed when installing the BG-20B.
It includes its own independent power supply and fan unit, for additional
reliability and security. The three multipurpose slots of the BG-20EH support
any combination of extractable traffic cards. TDM, ADM, Ethernet, CES, and
EoPDH traffic are all handled through cards in these traffic slots, with all
interfaces through convenient SFP modules.
Each BG-20EH platform is supplied with a power module slot and all
extension slots, initially empty. The three extension slots are covered by a
cover panel.
Installing the BG-20EH on the BG-20B

To install the BG-20EH on the BG-20B, a BG-20EH installation kit is needed.
The BG-20EH installation kit is shipped as part of the BG-20EH shelf package.
The kit includes the ASSEMBLE THE BG-20EH TO BG-20 ASSY (DWG
NO. 3HETC6-3422-068) drawing, which describes the installation process in
detail. Be sure to follow this drawing closely during BG-20EH installation. The
following procedure is a high-level summary of the installation process.
WARNING: Before starting to install the BG-20EH, make
sure that the DC power cable is not connected to the
BG-20EH, and that the circuit breakers in the RAP, if used,
are set to OFF.
CAUTION: Before adding the BG-20EH shelf to the
BG-20B, ensure that the rail stiffeners have been installed.
Without the rail stiffeners, it will be very difficult to install
the BG-20EH. If the rail stiffeners are not installed, it is
highly recommended that you first remove the BG-20B from
the rack and then install the rails stiffeners before proceeding
with the BG-20EH installation. For more details, see
Installing the Rail Stiffeners (page 3-31).
426006-2332-013-A04
3-45

Maintenance Manual
WARNING: Great care should be taken when installing the

BG-20EH in order to avoid damage to the BG-20B or
BG-20EH. Be sure to follow the drawing provided in the
BG-20EH installation kit.
To install the BG-20EH on the BG-20B:
Figure 3-38: Installing the BG-20EH on the BG-20B
1. Locate the BG-20EH installation kit in the BG-20EH shelf package.

2. Remove the cover plate on the BG-20B top cover by releasing the two
screws.
3. Assemble the MiniBP into the connector in the rear-right area of BG-20B.
Secure the MiniBP in place by tightening the screw with a screwdriver.
Check that the connectors on the MiniBP and in the BG-20B are fully
mated.
4. Identify the pilot pins and the corresponding threaded holes on top of the
BG-20B as shown in the figure above.
5. Insert the pilot pins into the holes and fasten them by hand.
6. Mount the BG-20EH on the BG-20B using the vertical pilot pins and holes
at the bottom of the BG-20EH. Check that the connectors on the MiniBP
and in the BG-20EH are fully mated.
7. Insert three rivet snaps into the holes on the bottom of the BG-20EH to
attach the BG-20EH to the BG-20B. Verify that the caps of the rivets are
flat on the bottom of the BG-20EH.
8. Fasten the BG-20EH to the rack side rails (to the screws in the rail
stiffeners) with four M6 screws and washers. BG-20EH shelf grounding is
achieved by connecting the shelf to the rack using rack mounting brackets.
Grounding is provided by contact when the unit is fastened to the rack.
3-46
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Disassembling the BG-20EH from the

BG-20B
In some cases it might be necessary to disassemble the BG-20EH from the
BG-20B shelf. The following procedure describes the correct way to do it. The
BG-20EH is attached to the BG-20B with three snap rivets; you must first
remove these rivets before removing the BG-20EH. It is recommended to use a
thin flat tool (like a screwdriver) to raise the rivet caps first, and then remove
the rivets.
Figure 3-39: Removing the BG-20E from the BG-20B
426006-2332-013-A04
3-47

Maintenance Manual
To disassemble the BG-20EH from the BG-20B:

1. Insert a thin flat-head screwdriver under the rivet cap.
Figure 3-40: Inserting the thin flat-head tool
2. Raise the rivet cap by the screwdriver.
Figure 3-41: Raising the rivet cap
3. Remove the rivet with your hand.
Figure 3-42: Removing the rivet
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to remove the other rivets.

5. Raise the BG-20EH from the BG-20B and remove it.
6. Disassemble the pin guides and the MiniBP from the BG-20B.
3-48
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Identifying Slots in the BG-20EH

The layout of the BG-20EH is depicted in the following figures.
Figure 3-43: BG-20EH regular slots layout
Figure 3-44: BG-20EH slots layout with ES 3# extended
The figures show two possible arrangements for the BG-20EH slots layout. The
upper figure shows the regular layout of the BG-20EH. The lower figure is
very similar to the first, with an extension arrangement for the uppermost slot
(ES 3#).
The BG-20EH shelf consists of the following slots:
Two slots (PS A and PS B) for installing two DC power supply modules
One slot (FS) for installing a fan module
Three slots (ES 1#, ES 2#, ES 3#) for accommodating expansion traffic
card (Eslots)
Slot ES 3# (can be extended) for housing a long card (TP63_1)
The following table lists the modules supported in current version that can be
configured in each slot in the BG-20EH.
Table 3-2:
BG-20EH modules
Name
INF_E2U
Applicable slots in BG-20EH

PS A
PS B
ES 1#
ES 2#
ES 3#
FCU_20EH
FS
SM_10E
PE1_63
P345_3E
S1_4
ESW_2G_8F_E
MPS_2G_8F
DMCE1_32
426006-2332-013-A04
ES 3# Extended
3-49

Maintenance Manual
Installing Power Modules in the BG-20EH

Each BG-20EH shelf must have a power module installed in the power module
slot. The INF_E2U can be configured according to the site installation plan.
The BG-20EH is always shipped with the power module slot empty.
Figure 3-45: Installing the INF_E2U in the BG-20EH
To install the power module on the BG-20EH:

the front of the BG-20EH shelf. If resistance is felt before the connectors
are flush, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.
3-50
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing an FCU_20EH in the BG-20EH

Each BG-20EH shelf must have one Fan Control module (FCU_20EH)
installed in the FCU slot. The BG-20EH is always shipped with the fan control
module slot empty. The procedure described in this section is therefore only
relevant when you want to replace the module.
Figure 3-46: Installing an FCU_20EH in the BG-20EH
This procedure is also applicable for replacing an operating FCU_20EH. To

perform the replacement in the shortest time, prepare the replacement
FCU_20EH in advance by taking it out of its package and placing it near the
operating unit.
CAUTION: To avoid traffic hit in an operating system, don't
turn it off while replacing an FCU_20EH. The system can
operate without a fan unit for up to 4 minutes. Perform the
replacement in this time.
To install an FCU_20EH in the BG-20EH:

3. Hold the FCU_20EH module extractor and insert the rear end of the power
module into the card guides.
the front of the BG-20EH shelf. If resistance is felt before the connectors
are flush, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.
5. Secure the module in place by tightening the two screws with a
screwdriver.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-51

Maintenance Manual
Installing Extension Cards in the BG-20EH

This section describes how to install extension cards. For a list of available
extension cards and their technical descriptions, refer to the BroadGate
Product Line Reference Manual.
The BG-20EH is shipped with its Eslots covered by blank panels. You should
remove the corresponding cover to install an extension card.
CAUTION: When installing a MPoE_12G card the total PoE
power budget is up to 90 W.
To install an extension card in the BG-20EH shelf:

Extension cards are installed in the Eslots of the BG-20EH shelf in accordance
with the site installation plan.
Figure 3-47: Installing an extension card in the BG-20EH
1. Identify the Eslot in which you want to install the extension card, according
to the site installation plan.
2. Loosen the two screws on the Eslot cover and remove it.
3. Check that the extension card has not been physically damaged during
sealed.
4. Remove the extension card from its antistatic protection packaging and
problems.
5. Hold the extension card handles and insert its rear end into the card guides.
6. Push the extension card in until the front of the card is flush with the front
of the BG-20EH shelf. If resistance is felt, pull the card out and repeat the
procedure.
7. Secure the card in place by fastening its two captive screws.
3-52
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
NOTE: Extension cards support live insertion. They can be

running on the BG-20B or BG-20EH.
Installing the BG-20C Shelf in

Racks
The BG-20C can be installed in ETSI, 19" and 23" racks. ECI Telecom offers
several options for installing it in racks with dedicated installation accessories
like: brackets and special designed shelves that enable to install two units in the
width of the rack.
The installation options in the different racks are as follows:
One BG-20C can be installed in an ETSI rack with mounting brackets
One BG-20C can be installed in a 19" rack with mounting brackets
One BG-20C can be installed in a 23" rack with mounting brackets
Two BG-20C can be installed on a special mounting shelf in an ETSI rack
Two BG-20C can be installed on a special mounting shelf in an 23" rack
The installation procedures are presented in the following sections.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-53

Maintenance Manual
Installing a single BG-20C in an ETSI Rack

A single BG-20C can be installed in an ETSI rack after attaching appropriate
brackets.
To attach ETSI brackets to the BG-20C:
The brackets are included in the installation kit. The left bracket is identified by
the grounding post on its front.
1. Attach the right bracket to the right side of the BG-20C with three M3 x 5
screws.
Figure 3-48: Installing ETSI brackets
2. Fasten the bracket to the BG-20C.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the left bracket.
3-54
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
To install a BG-20C in an ETSI rack:

Refer to the following figure for the installation of a single BG-20C in an ETSI
rack.
Figure 3-49: Installing the BG-20C in an ETSI rack
1. Identify the prescribed position of the BG-20C in the ETSI rack.

2. Attach the BG-20C to the rack with four M6 x 16 Phillips screws.
3. Fasten the BG-20C to the rack.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-55

Maintenance Manual
Installing a single BG-20C in a 19" Rack

A single BG-20C can be installed in a 19" rack after attaching appropriate
brackets.
To attach 19" brackets to the BG-20C:
the grounding post on its front.
screws.
Figure 3-50: Installing ETSI brackets

3-56
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
To install a single BG-20C in a 19" rack:

Refer to the following figure for the installation of a single BG-20C in a 19"
rack.
Figure 3-51: Installing the BG-20C in a 19" rack
1. Identify the prescribed position of the BG-20C in the 19" rack.

426006-2332-013-A04
3-57

Maintenance Manual
Installing a single BG-20C in a 23" Rack

A single BG-20C can be installed in a 23" rack after attaching appropriate
brackets.
To attach 23" brackets to the BG-20C:
the grounding posts on its front.
screws.
Figure 3-52: Installing 23 inch brackets

3-58
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
To install a single BG-20C in a 23" rack:

Refer to the following figure for the installation of a single BG-20C in a 23"
rack.
Figure 3-53: Installing the BG-20C in a 23" rack
1. Identify the prescribed position of the BG-20C in the 23" rack.

426006-2332-013-A04
3-59

Maintenance Manual
Installing Two BG-20C Units in an ETSI Rack

Because of its miniature size, two units of the BG-20C can be installed in the
width of an ETSI rack, using a special mounting shelf offered by the ECI
Telecom. A single BG-20C can also be installed on the same shelf, leaving an
empty place for future installation of a second unit.
To facilitate the installation of the BG-20C in the shelf it has two holes at the
bottom, which must be fitted into the corresponding pin guides on the
mounting shelf.
The shelf has a spacing bracket that keeps a distance between the two units and
guarantees adequate air flow, to prevent overheating.
The installation of a BG-20C on the mounting shelf, in an ETSI rack includes
the following steps:
Installing the ETSI mounting shelf in the rack
Attaching mounting brackets to the BG-20C
Installing the BG-20C on the mounting shelf.
To install the ETSI mounting shelf in the rack:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the mounting shelf in the ETSI rack.
Figure 3-54: Installing the ETSI mounting shelf
2. Attach the shelf to the rack with four M6 x 16 screws.

3. Fasten the shelf to the rack.
3-60
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
To attach the mounting brackets to the BG-20C:

The same mounting bracket is used on both sides of the BG-20C. The only
difference is that the bracket on the right side is attached with the captive screw
up, and on the left side with the captive screw down.
1. Orient the mounting bracket with the captive screw up and inwardly on the
right side of the BG-20C, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-55: Attaching mounting brackets to the BG-20C
2. Attach the bracket to the BG-20C with three M3 x 5 Phillips screws. Fasten
the bracket to the BG-20C.
3. Orient the second bracket with the captive screw down and inwardly on the
left side of the BG-20C, as shown in the figure above.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-61

Maintenance Manual
To install a BG-20C on the mounting shelf:

1. Carefully lower the BG-20C onto the required position on the mounting
shelf, taking care that the pin guides in the shelf are inserted into the slots
in the BG-20C.
Figure 3-56: Installing a BG-20C in an ETSI rack
2. Check that the BG-20C is securely positioned on the mounting shelf.

3. Fasten the BG-20C to the mounting shelf with the two captive screws,
located on the mounting brackets.
4. If a second BG-20C is to be installed, repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the second
BG-20C.
Installing Two BG-20C Units in a 23" Rack

Because of its miniature size, two units of the BG-20C can be installed in the
width of a 23" rack, using a special mounting shelf offered by the ECI
Telecom. A single BG-20C can also be installed on the same shelf, leaving an
empty place for future installation of a second unit.
To facilitate the installation of the BG-20C in the shelf it has two holes at the
bottom, which must be fitted into the corresponding pin guides on the
mounting shelf.
The shelf has a spacing bracket that keeps a distance between the two units and
guarantees adequate air flow, to prevent overheating.
The installation of a BG-20C on the mounting shelf, in a 23" rack includes the
following steps:
3-62
Installing the mounting shelf in the 23" rack
Attaching mounting brackets to the BG-20C
Installing the BG-20C on the mounting shelf.

426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
To install the 23" mounting shelf in the rack:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the mounting shelf in the 23" rack.
Figure 3-57: Installing the 23" mounting shelf
2. Attach the shelf to the rack with four M6x16 screws.

3. Fasten the shelf to the rack.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-63

Maintenance Manual
To attach the mounting brackets to the BG-20C:

The same mounting bracket is attached to both sides of the BG-20C. The only
difference is that the bracket on the right side is attached with the captive screw
up, and on the right side with the captive screw down.
1. Orient the mounting bracket with the captive screw up and inwardly, on the
right side of the BG-20C, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-58: Attaching mounting brackets to the BG-20C
3. Orient the second bracket with the captive screw down and inwardly on the
left side of the BG-20C, as shown in the figure above.
3-64
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
To attach the BG-20C to the mounting shelf:

1. Carefully lower the BG-20C onto the required position on the mounting
shelf, taking care that the pin guides in the shelf are inserted into the slots
in the BG-20C.
Figure 3-59: Installing a BG-20C in a 23" rack
2. Check that the BG-20C is securely positioned on the mounting shelf.

3. Fasten the BG-20C to the mounting shelf with the two captive screws,
located on the mounting brackets.
4. If a second BG-20C is to be installed on the shelf repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the
second BG-20C.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-65

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Fibers and Cables to

the BG-20 Shelf
In general, all electrical traffic cables, power cables, alarm cables, and data
cables should be routed along the sides of the rack. All optical fibers should be
routed through the conduits running along the front supports of the rack.
Electrical traffic and other cables (DC, alarm, management, timing, and so on)
should be routed along the side of the rack, held in place with combs.
Connecting Power Cables to a DC Power

Source
Follow the procedure below to connect power and alarm cables to a DC power
source.
To connect power cables:
1. Route the power cables leading from the RAP along the side of the rack to
the appropriate BG-20B and BG-20E shelves, and BG-OW box.
NOTE: For further details about the RAP installation
procedure, see Installing the RAP-BG and Installing the
RAP-4B (page 3-15). Installation of the BG-20E and BG-OW
are optional.
2. Connect the end of the DC power cable terminating with a 3-pin D-type
female connector, in accordance with the rack installation plan and the
cable tags, to the DC power connectors on the INF_20B, as follows:
If there is one power source (single power-feeding configuration), the

power cable is connected to the POWER IN A connector or POWER
IN B connector on the front panel of the INF_20B.
If there are two power sources (dual power-feeding configuration), the

power cable from one source is connected to the POWER IN A
connector and the power cable from the second source is connected to
the POWER IN B connector on the front panel of the INF_20B.
3-66
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
3. If required, connect the end of the DC power cable terminating with a 3-pin
D-type female connector, in accordance with the rack installation plan and
the cable tags, to the DC power connectors on the INF_20E, as follows:

IN B connector on the front panel of the INF_20E.

the POWER IN B connector on the front panel of the INF_20E.
4. If the use of double-headed DC power cables for both the BG-20B and the
BG-20E is required, connect the ends of the DC power cable terminating
with 3-pin D-type female connectors, in accordance with the rack
installation plan and the cable tags, to the DC power connectors on the
INF_20E and INF_20B, as follows:

IN B connector on the front panel of the INF_20E and INF_20B.

the POWER IN B connector on the front panel of the INF_20E and
INF_20B.
Make sure that the circuit breakers used in this option are 8 A ones.
5. If required, connect the end of the DC power cable terminating with a 3-pin
D-type female connector, in accordance with the rack installation plan and
the cable tags, to the DC power connectors on the BG-OW. The power
cable is connected to the POWER IN connector on the front panel of the
BG-OW.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-67

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Power Cables to an AC Power

Source
Follow the procedure below to connect power and alarm cables to an AC
power source.
To connect power cables to an AC source:
1. Route the power cables leading along the side of the rack to the appropriate
BG-20B and BG-20E shelves.
NOTE: For further details about the RAP installation
procedure, see Installing the RAP-BG and Installing the
RAP-4B (page 3-15).
For AC power supplies, the power cable is not connected to
the RAP.
2. Connect the AC power cable for the BG-20B. If AC power is used, connect
the power cable, as follows:
Connect the female connector of the power cable to the AC INPUT

connector on the AC_CONV_20B module.
Connect the power cable male connector to the AC line outlet.

3. Connect the AC power cable for the BG-20E shelf. If AC power is used,
connect the power cable, as follows:
Connect the female connector of the power cable to the AC INPUT

connector on the AC_CONV_20E module.
Connect the power cable male connector to the AC line outlet.

NOTE: The BG-OW does not support AC power feeding. To
use the BG-OW, an external AC/DC adapter must be used.
3-68
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connecting an Alarm Cable to the BG-20B

The BG-20B supports connection of an alarms cable directly to the customer's
alarm monitoring system.
The BG-20B alarm cable has a D-type, 15-pin, female connector on one side
and open ends on the other.
To connect an alarm cable to the BG-20B:
1. Connect the D-type connector to the ALARMS connector on the BG-20B.
2. Fasten the connector in place with its two screws.
3. Connect the open ends of the alarm cable to the customer's alarm
monitoring system in accordance with the wire functions.
Connecting Optical Fibers to Optical Modules

Before installing the BG-20 shelf and modules, all optical fibers should be
routed through the conduits running along the front supports of the ECI
Telecom recommended rack into the FST under the BG-20 shelf being
installed, and threaded into the FST. For more information, see Installing the
Fiber Storage Tray.
All optical fibers in the BG-20 shelf are connected to the LC connectors on the
optical SFP transceivers in the front panel of the BG-20B, SMD1/H or
OMS4B/H module, or ESW_2G_8F_E, MPS_2G_8F, or S1_4 cards.

characteristics.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-69

Maintenance Manual
To connect an optical fiber to an SFP module:

1. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to open the latch and pull the
FST out towards you.
2. Slowly pull the end of the appropriate fiber to release enough fiber from the
tray.
NOTE: The FST has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. If you cannot release the
fiber in the halfway position, pull the tray again to open it
fully.
3. Thread the end of the fiber through the rack slots to the optical transceiver
LC connector on the designated module. Leave some slack to prevent
stress.
4. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers using an approved
cleaning kit.
5. Remove the cover from the optical transceiver. Connect the fiber connector
to the LC connector on the optical transceiver.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for all optical modules in the BG-20 shelf.
7. When you have completed the connection of all optical modules, gently
push the FST back into the rack until it clicks into place.
Routing and Connecting Electrical Interface

Cables to the BG-20
This section provides instructions for connecting cables to BG-20 shelves. The
information presented here supplements the information regarding the
connection of power, alarm, and grounding cables described in previous
sections.
Connect the cables to the equipment connectors according to the information
appearing in the relevant cabling diagrams or tables. To identify the physical
location of connectors, use the equipment panel figures appearing in the
BroadGate Product Line Reference Manual.
3-70
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Routing and Connecting E1 Cables for

Balanced E1 Interfaces
E1 cables are used for connecting the balanced E1 (2 Mbps) interfaces on the
BG-20. There are two types of E1 cable for balanced E1 interfaces:
Type A1: cable for built-in E1 interfaces in the BG-20B

Each cable consists of a total of 11 E1 twisted pairs (transmit and receive)
supporting 11 E1s when connecting the lower SCSI-50 E1 connector
marked E1 (1-11) or 10 E1s when connecting the upper SCSI-50 E1
connector marked E1 (12-21). The same cable is used for two E1
connectors. The cable end connecting to the BG-20B shelf is terminated
with a 50-pin SCSI male connector.
Type B1: cable for E1 interfaces in the ME1_21/H, ME1_42/H, or PE1_63

Each cable consists of a total of 21 E1 twisted pairs (transmit and receive)
supporting 21 E1s. The cable end connecting to the ME1_21/H, ME1_42/H
module, or PE1_63 card is terminated with a twin 68-pin VHDCI male
connector.
To connect E1 cables to the BG-20:

1. Arrange the E1 traffic cables and route them to the rack side rails.
2. Pull each E1 cable down to the level of the BG-20 shelf.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack and
through the appropriate opening near the shelf until the cable connector is
positioned against the appropriate place. Use cable ties as required to fasten
the cable to the rack side rails.
4. Use a cabling diagram of the site to associate the BG-20 E1 connectors
with the appropriate DDF connections.
5. Connect the cable connector to the corresponding connectors on the
BG-20B, ME1_21/H, ME1_42/H, or PE1_63 front panel.
CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to
secure the cable connector, as this may damage the BG-20.
6. Secure the cable connector to the BG-20 connector with the cable
connector screws. Tighten the screws manually. If you cannot reach the
screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade screwdriver
(maximum blade size is 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N cm to 44 N
cm.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-71

Maintenance Manual

Unbalanced E1 Interfaces
The BG-20 can only provide balanced E1s directly. For unbalanced E1s, the
xDDF-21 patch panels must be installed with the BG-20. Each xDDF-21
provides balanced-to-unbalanced conversion for 21 E1s.
The cable between the BG-20 and the xDDF-21 (supplied by ECI Telecom)
consists of 21 E1 twisted pairs (transmit and receive) supporting 21 balanced
E1s.
There are two types of cable:
Cable Type A2: This cable is used to connect built-in E1 interfaces in the
BG-20B to the xDDF-21. The cable end connecting to the BG-20B shelf is
terminated with a twin 50-pin SCSI male connector. The cable end
connecting to the xDDF-21 is terminated with two 50-pin SCSI male
connectors.
Cable Type B2: This cable is used to connect E1 interfaces in the

ME1_21/H, ME1_42/H, or PE1_63 to the xDDF-21. The cable end
connecting to the ME1_21/H, ME1_42/H, or PE1_63 is terminated with a
68-pin VHDCI male connector. The cable end connecting to the xDDF-21
is terminated with two 50-pin SCSI male connectors.
To connect E1 cables between the BG-20 and the xDDF-21:

1. Arrange the E1 traffic cables and route them to the rack side rails.
2. Pull the twin 50-pin SCSI end or twin 68-pin VHDCI end of the cable
down to the level of the BG-20 shelf.
4. Connect the cable connector to the E1 connectors on the front panel of the
BG-20B, the ME1_21/H, ME1_42/H module, or the PE1_63 cards.
5. Secure the cable connector to the BG-20 connectors with four cable
cm.
6. Pull the 2 x 50-pin SCSI end of the cable to the level of the xDDF-21.
7. Bend the cables and thread them through the side cable guides of the rack
and through the appropriate opening near the shelf until the cable connector
is positioned against the appropriate place. Use cable ties as required to
fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
3-72
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
8. Connect the cable connector marked J1 to the 50-pin SCSI connector on the
xDDF-21 panel marked J1. Connect the cable connector marked J2 to the
50-pin SCSI connector on the xDDF-21 panel marked J2.
9. Secure the cable connectors to the xDDF-21 connectors with two cable
connector screws for each connector. Tighten the screws manually. If you
cannot reach the screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade
screwdriver (maximum blade size is 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N
cm to 44 N cm.
To connect E1 cables between the xDDF-21 and the external
DDF:
Coaxial cables are used for connecting unbalanced E1s between the
xDDF-21 and the external DDF. A pair of coaxial cables is used for each
E1. These coaxial cables can be prepared on site. The cable end connecting
to the xDDF-21 is terminated with a DIN 1.0/2.3 connector. The connector
on the other end of the cable depends on the connector used in the external
DDF. For the connection of coaxial cables, refer to Routing and Connecting
Coaxial Cables (page 3-73).
Routing and Connecting Coaxial Cables

Individual coaxial cables are used for connecting the interfaces located on the
M345_3, the P345_3E, the electrical STM-1 SFPs on the BG-20B or SMD1,
and the xDDF-21.
As part of the site preparations, suitable cables should be routed from the
relevant DDF (if used) to the intended rack location and connected to DIN
1.0/2.3 connectors. Sufficient length should be available to permit routing the
cables to the appropriate level in the rack.
To connect individual coaxial traffic cables to the BG-20 or
xDDF-21:
1. Based on the site cabling diagram, arrange the coaxial cables in groups
according to the designated electrical interfaces and route them along the
guides at the side of the rack to the appropriate BG-20 unit or xDDF-21
unit.
2. Connect the BG-20 or xDDF-21 end of the cables to DIN 1.0/2.3
connectors and the other end to the relevant coaxial cable connector,
crimping the cable as required.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack so
that the cable connector is positioned at the level of the appropriate adapter.
Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
4. Cut excess cable length, if necessary.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-73

Maintenance Manual
5. Connect the connector on the cable to the corresponding electrical

connector on the BG-20 or the xDDF-21.
6. Connect the connector on the other end of cable to the corresponding
electrical connector on the external DDF.
Routing and Connecting Data Interface

Cables to Ethernet Interfaces
Data cables with RJ-45 connectors are used for connecting FE interfaces on the
BG-20, including built-in FE interfaces on the BG-20B and FE interfaces on
the MEoP_4/MEoP_4H module and the ESW_2G_8F_E card.
As part of the site preparations, Category 5 or better cables should be routed
from the relevant Ethernet DDF (if used) to the intended rack location and
connected to the RJ-45 connectors. Sufficient length should be available to
permit routing the cables to the appropriate level in the rack.
To connect data cables to an Ethernet interface:
1. Based on the site cabling diagram, route the data cables along the guides at
the side of the rack to the appropriate BG-20 unit.
2. Pull each data cable down to the level of the BG-20 unit.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack so
that the cable connector is positioned at the level of the BG-20 unit. Use
cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
4. Connect the RJ-45 connector on the cable to the corresponding connector
on the BG-20 unit.
Routing and Connecting Electrical Cables for

PCM Interfaces
This section describes the connection of PCM interface electrical cables to the
VDF and ICPs.

PCM Interfaces to the VDF
Each type of SM_10E traffic module uses a SCSI-36 connector for its external
interfaces. An electrical cable with a SCSI-36 connector on one end and
another end that is open is used to connect each SM_10E traffic module to its
corresponding Voice-Frequency Distribution Frame (VDF), if ICPs are not
installed.
3-74
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
To connect PCM traffic cables to the VDF:

1. Arrange the PCM traffic cables and route them to the rack side rails.
2. Pull each PCM traffic cable down to the level of the SM_10E card.
4. Use a cabling diagram of the site to associate the SM_10E traffic module
connectors with the appropriate VDF connections.
5. Connect the cable connector to the corresponding connector on the
SM_10E traffic module front panel.
secure the cable connector, as this may damage the SM_10E

traffic module.
6. Secure the cable connector to the SM_10E traffic module connector with
the cable connector screws. Tighten the screws manually. If you cannot
reach the screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade
cm to 44 N cm.

PCM Interfaces to ICPs
To ease installation and connection to customer termination equipment, three
types of ICPs were developed. An electrical cable with SCSI-36 connectors on
both sides is used to connect an ICP to its corresponding SM_10E traffic
module. The same cable is used for any type of ICP.
To connect PCM traffic cables to an ICP:
1. Arrange the PCM traffic cables and route them to the rack side rails.
2. Pull one end of each PCM traffic cable to the level of the SM_10E card.
4. Use a cabling diagram of the site to associate the SM_10E traffic module
connectors with the appropriate ICP connections.
SM_10E traffic module front panel.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-75

Maintenance Manual

secure the cable connector, as this may damage the SM_10E
traffic module.
6. Secure the cable connector to the SM_10E traffic module connector with
the cable connector screws. Tighten the screws manually. If you cannot
reach the screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade
cm to 44 N cm.
7. Pull the other end of each PCM traffic cable to the level of the ICP.
through the appropriate opening near the ICP until the cable connector is
9. Connect the cable connector to the SCSI-36 connector on the ICP front
panel.
10. Secure the cable connector to the connector marked as J1 on the ICP front
panel with the cable connector screws. Tighten the screws manually. If you
cannot reach the screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade
cm to 44 N cm.
secure the cable connector, as this may damage the ICP.

ICPs
Connectors on the ICP_VF panel for external interfaces are RJ-45 connectors.
Connectors on the ICP_V24 panel for external interfaces are 15-pin D-type
connectors and 9-pin D-type connectors. Connectors on the ICP_V35 panel for
external interfaces are M34 connectors. For a detailed description of the ICPs,
see the BroadGate Product Line Reference Manual.
A VF cable is an electrical cable with an RJ-45 connector on one end and the
other end open. Each cable has six wires and can be used for one channel of the
following types of interfaces:
3-76
FXO
FXS
2W
4W
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
2W E&M
4W E&M
Codirectional 64 Kbps
Different interface types can use different wires in this cable. Use the
information in Connection Data (page A-1) to identify the wires for each type
of interface.
To connect VF cables to the ICP_VF:
1. Route the VF cables along the side of the rack to the appropriate ICP_VF.
2. Connect the free end of the cable, in accordance with the rack installation
plan and the cable tags, to the RJ-45 connector on the ICP_VF front panel.
3. Cut excess cable length, if necessary.
4. Use the information in to identify the wires, according to the type of
interface.
5. Prepare the relevant connector on the other end, if necessary.
6. Connect the other end according to site installation plan.
To connect V.24 cables to ICP_V24:
1. Arrange the V.24 cables and route them to the rack side rails.
2. Pull each V.24 cable to the level of the ICP_V24.
4. Use a cabling diagram of the site to associate the V.24 connectors with the
appropriate connections on the DDF or the customers termination
equipment.
ICP_V24 front panel.
6. Secure the cable connector to the ICP_V24 connector with the cable
cm.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-77

Maintenance Manual
To connect V.35 cables to the ICP_V35:

1. Arrange the V.35 cables and route them to the rack side rails.
2. Pull each V.35 cable to the level of the ICP_V35.
4. Use a cabling diagram of the site to associate the V.35 connectors with the
appropriate connections on the customers termination equipment.
ICP_V35 front panel.
6. Secure the cable connector to the ICP_V35 connector with the cable
cm.
Connecting Timing (Clock) Cables

Timing cables are connected to the T3/T4 RJ-45 connector on the BG-20B.
To connect a timing cable to the BG-20B:
1. Route the timing cables along the side of the rack to the appropriate
BG-20B shelf.
2. Connect the free end of the cable in accordance with the rack installation
plan and the cable tags to the T3/T4 connector on the BG-20B front panel.
3-78
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Orderwire Cables

There are two orderwire cables, including:
A cable with RJ-45 connectors on both sides, which is used to connect the
BG-OW to the BG-20B.
A cable with RJ-11 connectors on both sides, which is used to connect the
OW handset to the BG-OW.
To connect an RJ-45 orderwire cable:

1. Route the RJ-45 orderwire cable along the side of the rack from the
appropriate BG-20B shelf to the appropriate BG-OW box.
2. Connect one end of the cable, in accordance with the rack installation plan
and the cable tags, to the OW connector on the BG-20B front panel.
3. Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ-45 connector marked as
BG-NE on the BG-OW front panel.
To connect an RJ-11 orderwire cable:
1. Connect one end of the cable to the RJ-11 connector marked as HANDSET
on the BG-OW front panel.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ-11 connector on the OW
handset.
426006-2332-013-A04
3-79
3-80

Maintenance Manual
426006-2332-013-A04
4
BG-20B Wall-Mounted
Installations
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 4-1
Wall-Mounted Cabinet .................................................................................... 4-2
Installing the BG-20B in a Wall-Mounted Cabinet ......................................... 4-3
Installing the Interior Components .................................................................. 4-4
Installing Cabling Accessories ...................................................................... 4-10
DDF 21 E1s Unit ........................................................................................... 4-14
Installing the BG-20B and Three DDFs ........................................................ 4-18
Installing the BG-20B, Two DDFs, and an AC CONV Unit ........................ 4-21
Connecting Cabinet Grounding ..................................................................... 4-24
Routing and Connecting Cables and Fibers in the Cabinet ........................... 4-24
Connecting Fibers and Cables to the BG-20B in Wall-Mounted Cabinet ..... 4-32
Installing the Wall-Mounted Cabinet Covers and Door ................................ 4-33
Wall-Mounted Frame .................................................................................... 4-37
Installing the Wall-Mounted Frame .............................................................. 4-37
Installing the BG-20B and Accessories in the Wall-Mounted Frame ........... 4-41
Installing the Wall-Mounted Frame Front Cover .......................................... 4-46
Connecting Wall-Mounted Frame Grounding ............................................... 4-48
Routing and Connecting Cables and Fibers in the Frame ............................. 4-49
Overview
In addition to the regular installation of the BG-20B in different racks, ECI
Telecom offers two options for wall-mounted installations:
Wall-mounted cabinet
Wall-mounted frame
426006-2332-013-A04
4-1
BG-20B Wall-Mounted Installations

Maintenance Manual
These options are ideal for installations in small businesses or home offices
(SOHO).
The following sections provide detailed procedures for these installations.
Wall-Mounted Cabinet
The cabinet is 352 mm high, 600 mm wide, and 400 mm deep and has a
transparent front door. It includes a rear panel with four support rails to which
two 19" vertical extrusions are fastened. The equipment and cabling
accessories are attached to these extrusions.
The side, top, and bottom covers can easily and quickly be removed, providing
comfortable user-friendly access to the interior for installation and management
of all components.
Figure 4-1: Wall-mounted cabinet general view
The wall-mounted cabinet is shipped dismantled in a flat-pack packaging,

saving up to 50 % of transportation volume and facilitating delivery to the
point of assembly.
4-2
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-20B in a

Wall-Mounted Cabinet
The installation of a BG-20B in a wall-mounted cabinet includes the following
stages:
1. Installing the wall-mounted cabinet rear panel
2. Installing cabling accessories
3. Installing the BG-20B platform and ancillary equipment (three DDFs or
two DDFs and an AC CONV unit)
4. Connecting cables and fibers to the BG-20B platform and ancillary
equipment
5. Installing the wall-mounted cabinet covers and front door
426006-2332-013-A04
4-3

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Interior

Components
Before you start:
Unpack the wall-mounted cabinet components and perform a visual inspection
according to the instructions in Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection
(page 3-5).
DANGER: Safety cannot be guaranteed if shipping
damage is evident! Shipping damage must be reported to the
shipping company and manufacturer immediately upon
receipt.
The wall-mounted cabinet interior components are shown in the following
figure.
Figure 4-2: Wall-mounted cabinet interior components
4-4
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Preparing the Rear Panel Holes

To prepare the rear panel holes:
1. Identify the prescribed location of the rear panel on the wall.
NOTE: Make sure that the wall surface on which the cabinet
is mounted is completely flat, so that the front door opens and

closes properly.
2. Place the enclosed drilling template on the prescribed position; align it at

the desired height using a bubble level and secure it to the wall.
Figure 4-3: Preparing the rear panel holes
3. Drill four holes using the four upper holes in the template (the cabinet is 6U
high).
NOTE: Use a drill of max. 8 mm.
DANGER: The operator is responsible for the secure

mounting of the cabinet to the wall, using appropriate
installation materials.
426006-2332-013-A04
4-5

Maintenance Manual
The tools illustrated in the following figure are required for the installation (not
supplied with the cabinet).
Figure 4-4: Tools required for cabinet installation
Installing the Rear Panel

mounting of the cabinet to the wall, using appropriate
installation materials.
NOTE: Use only the self-tapping screws, supplied with the
cabinet.
4-6
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
To install the rear panel:

1. Place the rear panel on the drilled holes and align it correctly so that it is
flat. Place support beneath as required.
2. Attach the panel to the wall and fasten with four screws.
Figure 4-5: Installing the rear panel
Attaching the Support Rails

The rear panel has four holes for attaching support rails.
To attach the support rails:
1. Identify the four holes in the rear panel for the support rails (see the
following figure).
Figure 4-6: Installing the support rails
2. Attach a support rail to the rear panel and fasten with a hex screw using an
appropriate hex wrench.
3. Repeat Step 2 for the other three support rails.
426006-2332-013-A04
4-7

Maintenance Manual
Installing the 19" Vertical Extrusions

Two 19" vertical extrusions are attached to the support rails for the installation
of equipment and accessories.
To install the 19" vertical extrusions:
1. Place the extrusion at a distance of 104 mm (approx.) from the support rail
edge.
Figure 4-7: Installing the 19" vertical extrusions
2. Attach the extrusion to the upper and lower support rails with two hex
screws.
3. Fasten the extrusion with the screws using a hex wrench.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the second extrusion.
4-8
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing the C-Rail

A C-rail (so called because of its C shape) is attached to the upper side of the
rear panel. The C-Rail helps support various cabling accessories.
To install the C-rail:
1. Identify the two holes for mounting the C-rail on the rear panel.
2. Place the C-rail on the rear panel. Insert a flat washer and a hex screw in
the appropriate hole and fasten the C-rail.
Figure 4-8: Installing the C-rail
3. Repeat Step 2 for the second hole of the C-rail.
426006-2332-013-A04
4-9

Maintenance Manual
Installing Cabling Accessories

Several accessories are installed inside the cabinet to facilitate cable and fiber
routing and to ground it. They include:
Cable guides
Cable clamping bars
Fiber optic protective tube
Grounding cables
Figure 4-9: Cabling accessories installed in the cabinet
4-10
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing Cable Guides

Cable guides are installed on both sides of the vertical extrusions and help
route cables neatly in the cabinet.
Before you start:
Identify the cable guide with its components according to the following figure;
the cable guide has an installation bracket attached.
Figure 4-10: Cabling accessories
426006-2332-013-A04
4-11

Maintenance Manual
To install the cable guides:

1. Align the cable guide on the side of the extrusion to an approx. height of
178 mm from the lower support rail (see the figure Cabling accessories
(page 4-11)).
2. Attach the cable guide to the vertical extrusion with two screws, flat
washers, sprig washers and nuts, in the order shown in the figure Cabling
accessories (page 4-11).
3. Fasten the cable guide to the extrusion.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the second cable guide.
Attaching Cable Clamping Bars

Two cable clamping bars are attached to the C-rail. They help route cables
neatly in the cabinet.
To attach the cable clamping bars:
1. Identify the cable clamping bar according to the figure Cabling accessories
(page 4-11).
2. Attach the clamping bar on the left side of the C-rail by snapping it on the
rail.
3. Attach the second clamping bar on the right side of the C-rail.
Attaching the Fiber Guide Tube

The fiber guide tube facilitates fiber routing in the cabinet. It is attached to the
right vertical extrusion, the right cable guide, and the right clamping bar.
To attach the fiber guide tube:
1. Identify the fiber guide tube attachment points according to the figure
Cabling accessories installed in the cabinet (page 4-10).
2. Attach one end of the fiber guide tube with a cable tie to the right extrusion
at a height of approx. 90 mm from the right lower support rail (see the
figure Cabling accessories installed in the cabinet (page 4-10)).
3. Shape the tube as shown in the figure Cabling accessories (page 4-11), and
attach it to the right cable guide (near the rear panel) with a cable tie.
4. Attach the other end of the tube to the right clamping bar with a cable tie.
4-12
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing Grounding Cables

Five grounding cables must be installed in the wall-mounted cabinet. At one
end the cables are attached to the support rails as described in the following
procedure. The other end of the cables is connected to the cabinet covers and
door during their installation as described in Installing the wall-mounted
cabinet covers and door (page 4-33).
To install grounding cables:
1. Identify the attachment points of the five grounding cables according to the
figure Cabling accessories (page 4-11).
2. Connect the round terminal lug of a grounding cable to the left lower
support rail outer hole (near the rear panel) with a hex self-tapping screw;
fasten the cable to the support rail using a hex wrench.
3. Repeat Step 2 to connect four more grounding cables to the following
points:
Left lower support rail inner hole, near the rear panel.
Left upper support rail inner hole, near the rear panel.
Right lower support rail outer hole, near the rear panel.
Right upper support rail inner hole, near the front.
426006-2332-013-A04
4-13

Maintenance Manual
DDF 21 E1s Unit

The DDF unit supports connection of up to 21 E1 lines. The terminal blocks
connect the equipment side and the customer's E1 interfaces. The unit is 1U
high and can be installed in ETSI or 19" racks using reversible brackets.
The DDF is equipped with five connection blocks, each supporting connection
of five full E1 lines (transmit and receive). The block can also be wired to serve
only transmit or receive lines (total ten lines).
The rear side of the DDF tray includes a cable tie comb that facilitates cable
wiring. In addition, several cable retainers on the DDF tray help keep wire
routing and connection neat.
The connection blocks are attached to bushings located in front of the DDF
tray.
Figure 4-11: DDF general view
4-14
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Assembling the DDF

The DDF comes dismantled and must be assembled in the field. Assembling
includes the following steps:
1. Installing the reversible mounting brackets
2. Attaching the connection blocks
Installing Mounting Brackets

The DDF has reversible brackets that by default are assembled for 19" rack
installation. If your installation is in a 19" rack, skip this procedure.
To attach the brackets for ETSI installation:
1. Unscrew the six M2.5 x 6 screws (three on each side) attaching the brackets
to the DDF tray. Keep the screws for the next steps.
Figure 4-12: Installing the brackets for ETSI installation
2. Rotate the bracket to the ETSI position; in this position the longer part of
the bracket is attached to the tray.
3. Use three M2.5 x 6 screws removed in Step 1 to attach the bracket to the
DDF tray.
4. Fasten the bracket to the DDF.
5. Repeat Steps 2 to 4 for the second bracket.
426006-2332-013-A04
4-15

Maintenance Manual
Attaching Connection Blocks

Five connection blocks are attached to the DDF tray. Two blocks are attached
to each bushing pair except for the leftmost pair, to which one block is
attached.
Each block is equipped with a labeling cover that protects the contacts and
helps identify the wire connections for maintenance and repair purposes.
To attach the connection blocks:
1. Place the block in front of the corresponding DDF bushing pair as shown in
the following figure.
Figure 4-13: Attaching the connection blocks
2. Push the block on the bushings to snap it on.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to attach the other four connection blocks.
4-16
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Wiring the E1 Cables to the DDF

The DDF terminal blocks connect the wires from the equipment and the wires
from the customer interfaces. The E1 cables from the equipment are routed to
the rear part of the DDF and passed to the connection blocks. The cables from
the customer E1 interfaces are routed to the sides of the DDF and connect to
the corresponding blocks.
The following sections describe the connection of the equipment and the
customer lines to the DDF.
Connecting Equipment Cables

The cables from the equipment are routed to the rear of the DDF tray. The tray
has a cable support comb to facilitate cable routing.
To connect an equipment E1 cable:
1. Route the E1 cable from the equipment to the rear part of the DDF.
2. Remove the outer cable jacket, as required, to expose the wire pairs.
3. Use cable ties as needed to attach the cable edge to the cable holder comb.
4. Route the wire pairs through the plastic frame (at the rear of the block).
5. Connect each pair to the corresponding block contacts according to the
wiring diagram.
Connecting Customer Cables

Cables from the customer interfaces are routed to the sides of the DDF tray.
The tray has cable retainers to help route customer cables neatly.
To connect a customer E1 cable:
1. Route the E1 cable from the customer's facility to the left or right side of
the DDF tray according to the position of the corresponding block.
2. Remove the outer cable jacket, as required, to expose the wire pairs.
3. Use cable ties as required to attach the cable edge to the cable retainers.
4. Route the wire pairs through the plastic frame (at the rear of the block).
5. Connect each pair to the corresponding block contacts according to the
wiring diagram.
426006-2332-013-A04
4-17

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-20B and Three

DDFs
In this configuration the BG-20B and three DDF units are installed in the
cabinet. Installation includes the following steps:
1. Installing clip nuts
2. Installing the BG-20B
3. Installing three DDFs
Figure 4-14: Installing a BG platform and three DDFs
4-18
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing Clip Nuts for the BG and DDFs

Sixteen clip nuts, eight on each side, are attached to the two vertical extrusions
to support the BG-20B and DDFs.
To install the clip nuts:
1. Identify the locations of the clip nuts according to the following figure: the
numbers refer to the distance in mm of the clip nuts from the lowest hole (0
mm).
Figure 4-15: Clip nuts distance in mm (BG and three DDFs)
2. Place a clip nut in the required place at the rear side of the hole in the right
vertical extrusion, and push to snap it in.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the other seven clip nuts on the right vertical
extrusion.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to install eight clip nuts on the left vertical extrusion.
426006-2332-013-A04
4-19

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-20B Platform

The BG-20B platform is installed at the bottom of the cabinet.
To install the BG-20B platform:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the BG-20B in the cabinet according to
the figure Installing a BG platform and three DDFs (page 4-18).
2. Place the BG-20B platform in the prescribed position using the two
stabilizing pins to hold it temporarily in place.
3. Fasten the platform to the vertical extrusion with four M6 screws and flat
washers.
Installing the DDFs

The DDFs are installed above the BG-20B in the cabinet.
To install the DDFs:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the DDF in the cabinet according to the
figure Installing a BG platform and three DDFs (page 4-18).
2. Place the DDF in the prescribed position, and then fasten it to the vertical
extrusions with four M6 screws and flat washers.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the other two DDFs.
4-20
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-20B, Two

DDFs, and an AC CONV Unit
In this configuration, the BG-20B, two DDFs, and an AC CONV unit are
installed in the cabinet. Installation includes the following steps:
1. Installing clip nuts
2. Installing the BG-20B
3. Installing two DDFs
4. Installing the AC CONV unit
Figure 4-16: Installing a BG platform, two DDFs, and an AC CONV unit
426006-2332-013-A04
4-21

Maintenance Manual
Installing Clip Nuts for the BG, DDFs, and AC

CONV Unit
Sixteen clip nuts, eight on each side, are attached to the two vertical extrusions
to support the BG-20B, DDFs, and AC CONV unit installation.
To install the clip nuts:
1. Identify the locations of the clip nuts according to the following figure. The
numbers refer to the distance in mm of the clip nuts from the lowest hole (0
mm).
Figure 4-17: Clip nuts distance in mm (BG, two DDFs, AC CONV unit)
2. Place a clip nut in the required place at the rear side of the hole in the right
vertical extrusion, and push it to snap in.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the other seven clip nuts on the right vertical
extrusion.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to install eight clip nuts on the left vertical extrusion.
4-22
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-20B Platform

The BG-20B platform is installed at the bottom of the cabinet.
To install the BG-20B platform:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the BG-20B in the cabinet according to
the figure Installing a BG platform, two DDFs, and an AC CONV unit
(page 4-21).
2. Place the BG-20B platform in the prescribed position using the two
stabilizing pins to hold it temporarily in place.
3. Fasten the platform to the vertical extrusion with four M6 screws and flat
washers.
Installing DDFs
The DDFs are installed above the BG-20B in the cabinet.
To install the DDFs:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the DDF in the cabinet according to the
figure Installing a BG platform, two DDFs, and an AC CONV unit (page 421).
2. Place the DDF in the prescribed position and fasten it to the vertical
extrusions with four M6 screws and flat washers.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the second DDF.
Installing the AC CONV Unit

The AC CONV unit is installed in the upper position of the wall-mounted
cabinet.
To install the AC CONV unit:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the AC CONV unit in the cabinet
according to the figure Installing a BG platform, two DDFs, and an AC
CONV unit (page 4-21).
2. Place the AC CONV unit in the prescribed position and fasten it to the
vertical extrusions with four M6 screws and flat washers.
426006-2332-013-A04
4-23

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Cabinet Grounding

The cabinet must be connected to the site grounding bar with a ground cable
according to ETSI recommendations.
The cabinet is supplied with a main grounding bolt welded to it. The grounding
stud is identified by the ground symbol label.
The bolt must be free of paint. The cabinet grounding bolt must be connected
to the site grounding bar by a grounding cable with a cross section of the same
size as the power feeding cable or thicker, as short as possible, in compliance
with UL/ETSI recommendations. ECI Telecom recommends using a grounding
cable of 12 AWG to 16 AWG. The cable must be made of copper strands with
a green/yellow jacket and terminated on both sides with bolt terminals.
To ground the cabinet:
1. Unscrew the nut and spring washer from the grounding bolt (M8 size) in
the cabinet. The grounding bolt is marked L2 as shown in the figure
Connecting grounding cables (page 4-35).
2. Connect the grounding cable from the site grounding (terminated with an
M8 lug) to the grounding bolt.
3. Attach the grounding cable with the nut and spring washer removed in Step
1, and fasten the cable to the bolt.
Routing and Connecting Cables

and Fibers in the Cabinet
cables must be routed in the space beneath the BG-20B platform and the
cabinet floor. All optical fibers are routed through the flexible tube attached to
the right side of the cabinet. The side to which the cables are passed is
determined by the side of the connectors on the BG-20B front panel. For
instance, power connectors are on the left side of the BG-20B, so the power
cables are routed on the left side beneath the platform. The cables are then
attached to the cable guide on the left side of the cabinet with cable ties.
When routing the various types of cables, several principles must be observed
to avoid electromagnetic and RF interference:
4-24
Traffic cables must not be routed in the same route as power cables.
Optical fibers must always be routed through the special flexible tube only.
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
The following sections provide detailed descriptions of cable and fiber

connection and routing.
Figure 4-18: Wall-mounted cabinet cabling
426006-2332-013-A04
4-25

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Power Cables

The power cables are connected to the corresponding connectors on the
BG-20B platform.
NOTE: To facilitate power cable routing, it is recommended
to start from the BG-20B platform towards the power source.
To connect power cables:
1. Connect the connector at the end of the power cable to the power connector
on the BG-20B, and fasten it with its two screws.
2. Grasp the connector at the other end of the power cable, and thread it
through the space beneath the platform.
Figure 4-19: Wall-mounted cabinet cables routing front view
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the second power cable to be connected to the
corresponding connector on the platform.
4. Bend the cables and thread them through the left cable guide of the cabinet.
4-26
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
5. Route the cable near the left cable clamp on the C-rail.
6. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the cable guide and to the
cable clamp.
Figure 4-20: Wall-mounted cabinet cables routing left side view
7. Route the cables through the opening in the top cover.

8. Connect the free ends of the power cables in accordance with the cabinet
installation plan and the cable tags to the DC power connectors on the
power source.
426006-2332-013-A04
4-27

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Alarm Cables

The alarm cable is connected to the corresponding ALARMS connector on the
BG-20B.
To connect the alarm cable:
1. Connect the connector of the alarm cable, in accordance with the frame
installation plan and the cable tags, to the ALARMS connector on the
BG-20B.
2. Secure the cable connector to the ALARMS connector with the cable
(maximum blade size 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N cm to 44 N
cm.
3. Bend the cable and route it above the BG-20B and through to the left side
cable guide.
4. Route the cable near the left cable clamp on the C-rail.
5. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the cable holder and to the
cable clamp.
6. Route the cables through the opening in the top cover.
7. Connect the free ends of the alarm cable in to the customer's facility
accordance with the cabinet installation plan and the cable tags.
Connecting Optical Fibers

All optical fibers in the BG-20B platform are connected to the LC connectors
on the SFP/XFP transceivers. Optical fibers must be routed through the flexible
tube attached to the right side of the cabinet.
Before you start:

characteristics.
4-28
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
To connect an optical fiber to a BG-20B module/card:

1. Insert the end of the fiber into the upper end of the flexible tube and pull it
at the lower end, near the BG-20B.
2. Bring the end of the fiber to the LC connector on the designated
module/card. Leave some slack to prevent stress.
3. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers, using an approved
cleaning kit.
4. Remove the cover from the module/card connector and connect the fiber
connector to it.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for all optical fibers to be connected to BG-20B
modules/cards.
Routing and Connecting Electrical Traffic

Cables
Multipair cables are used to connect to the balanced E1 (2 Mbps) interfaces
located on E1 modules installed in the BG-20B.
Each cable consists of a total of 21 E1 twisted pairs per cable (transmit or
receive). The cable end connecting to the E1 module is terminated with an
appropriate male connector.
To connect multipair cables:
1. Bring the cable connector against the appropriate slot and connect the cable
connector to the corresponding module.
2. Secure the cable connector to the module connector with the two cable
connector screws. Tighten the screws manually; if the screws cannot be
reached with your bare hand, use an adjustable-torque flatblade
screwdriver.
3. Bend the cables and thread them through the left side cable guide of the
cabinet.
4. Route the cables near the left cable clamp on the C-rail.
NOTE: The cable route described above assumes that the E1
module is installed on the left side in the BG-20B. If it is
installed on the right side, perform the same procedural steps
but on the cabinet's right side.
5. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the cable guide and to the
cable clamp.
426006-2332-013-A04
4-29

Maintenance Manual
6. Use a cabling diagram of the cabinet (or site) to associate module

connectors with the appropriate DDF connections. Cut excess cable length
if necessary.
7. If the DDF is installed in the frame, see Wiring the E1 Cables to the DDF
(page 4-17) for connecting the E1 cables to the DDF wiring blocks.

Individual coaxial cables are used to connect to the interfaces located on
E3/DS-3 and electrical STM-1 modules.
As part of site preparations, suitable cables must be routed from the relevant
High Rate DDF (if used) to the intended cabinet location and connected to the
coaxial cables with DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors. Leave sufficient length to permit
routing the cables to the appropriate level in the cabinet.
To connect coaxial traffic cables to E3/DS-3 or STM-1
modules:
1. Pull each coaxial cable to the level of the corresponding electrical
connection module.
2. Connect the DIN 1.0/2.3 connector on the cable to the corresponding
connector on the module.
3. Based on the cabinet (or site) cabling diagram, arrange the coaxial cables in
groups according to the designated module and route them along the left
side of the cabinet.
4. Bend the cables and thread them through the left side cable guide of the
cabinet.
5. Route the cables near the left cable clamp on the C-rail.
NOTE: The cable route described above assumes that the
E3/DS-3 or electrical STM-1 module is installed on the left
side of the BG-20B. If it is installed on the right side, perform
the same procedural steps but on the cabinet's right side.
6. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the cable guide and to the
cable clamp.
7. Cut excess cable length if necessary.
4-30
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual

Timing cables are connected to the T3/T4 connector of the BG-20B platform.
To connect a timing cable to the BG-20B platform:
1. Route the timing cables along the side of the cabinet.
2. Pull the cable down to the level of the T3/T4 connector and bend it until the
cable connector is positioned against the timing connector.
3. Connect the free end of the cable in accordance with the cabinet installation
plan and the cable tags to connector T3/T4 on the platform.
4. Secure each cable connector using its two screws.
5. Bend the cable and thread it through the right side cable guide of the
cabinet.
6. Route the cables near the right cable clamp on the C-rail.
7. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the cabinet cable guide and
cable clamp.
Connecting Management Cables

Management cables are connected to the RJ-45 connectors designated MNG on
the BG-20B platform. Each cable is terminated with an RJ-45 plug.
To connect management cables to the BG-20B platform:
1. Bring the cable plug against the appropriate connector on the BG-20B.
2. Connect the management station cable to the MNG connector of the
platform in accordance with the frame installation plan and the cable tags.
3. Thread the cable through the space above the BG-20B and the left side of
the cabinet.
4. Bend the cable and thread it through the left side cable guide of the cabinet.
5. Route the cables near the right cable clamp on the C-rail.
6. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the cabinet cable guide and
cable clamp.
426006-2332-013-A04
4-31

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Fibers and Cables to

the BG-20B in Wall-Mounted
Cabinet
cables should be routed along the sides of the wall-mounted cabinet. All optical
fibers must be routed through the fiber guide tube. Electrical traffic and other
cables (DC, alarm, management, timing, and so on) must be routed along the
side of the cabinet, and held in place with cable ties.
Use detailed practices described in the BG-20 Installation Manual for
performing the cables routing and connections.
In general the electrical traffic cables should not be routed in the same route as
power cables. The power connectors on the BG-20B are on the left; therefore
they should be routed from the left side of the BG-20B pass in the space
between the BG-20B and the unit installed above it. Then the cable should be
passed through the left cable guide, routed up to the left cable clamp bar and
attached to it with cable ties. It should then be passed upward to the openings in
the top cover of the cabinet to the outer world.
In a similar way, cable connected to connector on the right side of the BG-20B,
for instance T3/T4 (clock) cable should be routed from the right side of the
BG-20B in the space between the unit and the unit installed above it. Then the
cable should be passed through the right cable guide, routed up to the right
cable clamp bar and attached to it with cable ties.
The route of fibers connected to the BG-20B should always pass through the
fiber protection tube. This means that the fiber should be inserted in the tube
and come out from its other side from there it should be routed upward to the
opening in the top cover of the cabinet.
4-32
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Wall-Mounted

Cabinet Covers and Door
After completing the equipment installation and cabling, you are ready to
install the cabinet covers and door. After each cover is installed, a grounding
cable is attached to it.
Installing the Top and Bottom Covers

To install the bottom cover:
1. Slide the bottom cover into place while inserting the two protrusions on the
cover into the opposite housing on the rear panel (marked F1 in the
following figure).
Figure 4-21: Installing top and bottom covers
2. Fasten the bottom cover to the lower support rails with four self-tapping
screws (F2) (two on each side).
426006-2332-013-A04
4-33

Maintenance Manual
3. Attach the corresponding grounding cable snap lug to the bottom cover (see
the following figure).
Figure 4-22: Connecting grounding cables
To install the top cover:

1. Slide the top cover while inserting the two protrusions on the cover into the
opposite housing on the rear panel (see the figure Installing top and bottom
covers (page 4-33)).
2. Fasten the top cover to the upper support rails with four self-tapping screws
(F2) (two on each side).
3. Attach the corresponding grounding cable snap lug to the top cover.
4-34
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Side Covers

To install the right side cover:
1. Slide the right side cover into place while inserting the two protrusions on
the cover into the opposite housing on the rear panel (marked J1 in the
following figure).
Figure 4-23: Installing side covers
2. Fasten the right side cover to the top and bottom covers with two Phillips
screws (J2), one on each side.
3. Attach the corresponding grounding cable snap lug to the right side cover
(see the following figure).
Figure 4-24: Connecting grounding cables
426006-2332-013-A04
4-35

Maintenance Manual
To install the left side cover:

1. Slide the left side cover into place while inserting the two protrusions on
the cover into the opposite housing on the rear panel (see the figure
Installing side covers (page 4-35)).
2. Fasten the left side cover to the top and bottom covers with two Phillips
screws (J2), one on each side.
3. Attach the corresponding grounding cable snap lug to the left side cover.
Installing the Front Door

To install the front door:
1. Slide the door upper hinge into the corresponding slot in the top cover (see
the following figure).
Figure 4-25: Installing the front door
2. Align the door lower hinge into the corresponding slot in the bottom cover.
3. Adjust the door to open and close freely.
4-36
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
4. Fasten the upper and lower hex screws with a hex wrench.
5. Attach the corresponding grounding cable snap lug to the door (see the
following figure).
Figure 4-26: Connecting the door grounding cable
Wall-Mounted Frame
The wall-mounted frame is another option for installing the BG-20B and
accessories in SOHO.
The wall-mounted frame is 300 mm high, 600 mm wide, and 350 mm deep.
The front transparent cover protects the BG-20B traffic and fiber cables against
unintended disconnection or bending.

Frame
Wall-mounted frame installation includes the following steps:
1. Installing the cable supports
2. Installing the fiber guide tube
3. Preparing the frame installation holes
4. Installing the frame
426006-2332-013-A04
4-37

Maintenance Manual
Installing Cable Supports

Four cable supports are installed in the wall-mounted frame, two on each side.
To facilitate installation, install the cable supports in the frame before attaching
the frame to the wall.
To install the cable supports in the frame:
1. Identify the cable supports according to the following figure; use this figure
as reference in the following steps.
Figure 4-27: Wall-mounted frame installation
The lower cable support is attached to the frame side in holes 5 and 8 from
the bottom as shown in the figure above.
2. Attach the lower cable support to the frame with four M3 Phill. screws,
spring washers, and flat washers.
3. Fasten the cable support to the frame.
4-38
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for attaching the upper cable support to the frame. (The
upper cable support is attached to the frame side in holes 5 and 8 from the
top as shown in the figure above.)
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 for installing two cable supports on the other side of the
frame.
Attaching the Fiber Guide Tube

The fiber guide tube facilitates fiber routing in the frame. It is attached to the
right side of the frame and fastened to the cable supports.
To attach the fiber guide tube:
1. Identify the fiber guide tube attachment points according to the following
figure.
Figure 4-28: Attaching the fiber guide tube
2. Attach one end of the fiber guide tube with a cable tie to the lower cable
support near the front of the frame.
3. Shape the tube as shown in the figure, and attach it to the lower cable
support (near the rear of the frame) with a cable tie.
4. Attach the tube to the upper cable support (near the rear of the frame) with
a cable tie.
426006-2332-013-A04
4-39

Maintenance Manual
Preparing Installation Holes

The wall-mounted frame needs four installation holes.
To prepare the installation holes:
1. Place the wall-mounted frame on the prescribed location on the wall. Make
sure that the wall surface is flat and even.
2. Use the frame as a template and mark the required holes through the frame.
You can use the dimensions (in mm) in the following figure as reference.
Figure 4-29: Holes location for wall-mounted frame
3. Drill four holes in the wall according to the markings.
Attaching the Wall-Mounted Frame

mounting of the frame to the wall, using appropriate
installation practice and materials.
To attach the wall-mounted frame:
1. Place the frame on the drilled holes and align it flat. Place support beneath
as required.
2. Attach the frame to the wall and fasten it with four screws.
4-40
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-20B and

Accessories in the Wall-Mounted
Frame
ECI Telecom offers four configurations for installing the BG-20B and various
accessories in the wall-mounted frame. You can select the most suitable
configuration according to your application.
The configurations are:
BG-20B and three DDFs (option 1)
BG-20B, a DDF, and a RAP-BG (option 2)
BG-20B, a DDF, and an AC/DC CONV unit (option 4)
BG-20B and a DDF (option 5)
426006-2332-013-A04
4-41

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-20B and Three DDFs

(Option 1)
Figure 4-30: Installing a BG and three DDFs
To install the BG-20B:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the BG-20B in the wall-mounted frame.
2. Attach the BG-20B to the frame with four M6 Phill. screws and flat
washers.
3. Fasten the BG-20B to the frame.
To install the three DDFs:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the lower DDF in the wall-mounted
frame.
2. Attach the DDF to the frame using four M6 Phill. screws and flat washers.
3. Fasten the DDF to the frame.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for installing the other two DDFs.
4-42
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing the BG-20B, a DDF, and a RAP-BG

(Option 2)
Figure 4-31: Installing a BG, a DDF, and a RAP-BG

washers.
To install the DDF:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the DDF in the wall-mounted frame.
2. Attach the DDF to the frame with four M6 Phill. screws and flat washers.
426006-2332-013-A04
4-43

Maintenance Manual

1. Identify the prescribed position of the RAP-BG in the wall-mounted frame.
2. Attach the RAP-BG to the frame with four M6 Phill. screws and flat
washers.
3. Fasten the RAP-BG to the frame.
Installing the BG-20B, a DDF, and an AC/DC

CONV (Option 4)
Figure 4-32: Installing a BG, a DDF, and an AC/DC CONV

washers.
4-44
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
To install the DDF:

To install the AC/DC CONV:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the AC/DC CONV in the wall-mounted
frame.
2. Attach the AC/DC CONV to the frame with four M6 Phill. screws and flat
washers.
3. Fasten the AC/DC CONV to the frame.
Installing the BG-20B and a DDF (Option 5)
Figure 4-33: Installing a BG and a DDF
426006-2332-013-A04
4-45

Maintenance Manual

washers.
To install the DDF:

Frame Front Cover
The transparent cover protects the BG-20B traffic and fiber cables against
unintended disconnection or bending. The cover is attached to four holders on
the frame's front side.
The installation of the cover includes the following steps:
1. Installing the cover holders
2. Attaching the transparent cover
4-46
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Cover Holders

Four holders are installed in front of the wall-mounted frame.
To install the cover holders:
1. Identify the cover holder positions on the frame according to the following
figure.
Figure 4-34: Installing the front cover
2. Insert a holder into the left upper groove on the frame and attach it with an
M4 Phill. screw, spring washer, and flat washer.
3. Fasten the holder to the frame.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to attach a holder to the left lower side of the frame.
5. Repeat Steps 2 to 4 to install two holders on the right side of the frame.
426006-2332-013-A04
4-47

Maintenance Manual
Attaching the Transparent Protection Cover

NOTE: The protection cover is attached in place only after all
cabling functions of the BG-20B and the other equipment,
described in Routing and Connecting Cables and Fibers in the
Frame (page 4-49), have been completed.
To attach the protection cover:
1. Identify the cover and the four latch pins according to the figure Installing
the front cover (page 4-47).
2. Insert a latch pin into each corner hole in the cover.
3. Attach the cover to the holders by inserting the pins into the corresponding
holes in the holders.
4. Push the pin latches into the holders to lock them in place.
Connecting Wall-Mounted Frame

Grounding
The frame must be connected to the site grounding bar with a grounding cable
according to ETSI recommendations.
The frame is supplied with a main grounding bolt welded on the right
installation bracket. The grounding stud is identified on the frame by the
ground symbol label.
The bolt must be free of paint and connected to the site grounding bar by a
grounding cable with a cross section of the same size as the power feeding
cable or thicker, as short as possible, in compliance with UL/ETSI
recommendations. ECI Telecom recommends using a grounding cable of 12
AWG to 16 AWG made of copper strands, with a green/yellow jacket and
terminated on both sides with bolt terminals.
To ground the wall-mounted frame:
1. Unscrew the nut and spring washer from the grounding bolt (M6 size) in
the frame. The grounding bolt is shown in the figure Routing and
connecting cable and fibers in the wall-mounted frame (page 4-49).
2. Connect the grounding cable from the site grounding, terminated with an
M6 lug, to the grounding bolt.
3. Attach the grounding cable with the nut and spring washer removed in Step
1, and fasten the cable to the bolt.
4-48
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Routing and Connecting Cables

and Fibers in the Frame
cables are routed in the space beneath the BG-20B platform and the frame
floor. All optical fibers should be routed through the flexible tube attached to
the right side of the wall-mounted frame. The side to which the cables are
passed is determined by the side of the connectors on the BG-20B front panel.
For instance, power connectors are on the left side of the BG-20B, so power
cables are routed on the left side beneath the platform. The cables are then
attached to the cable supports on the left side of the frame with cable ties.
When routing the various types of cables, observe these principles to avoid
electromagnetic and RF interference:
Traffic cables must not be routed in the same route as power cables.
Optical fibers must be routed through the special flexible tube only.
Figure 4-35: Routing and connecting cables and fibers in the wall-mounted frame
426006-2332-013-A04
4-49

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Power Cables

The power cables are connected to the corresponding connectors on the
BG-20B platform.
NOTE: To facilitate power cable routing, it is recommended
to start from the BG-20B platform towards the power source.
To connect a power cable:
1. Connect the connector at the end of the power cable to the power connector
of the BG-20B and fasten it with its two screws.
2. Grasp the connector at the other end of the power cable and thread it
through the space between the platform and the frame.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the second power cable to be connected to the
corresponding connector on the platform.
4. Bend the cables and route them adjacent to the left side cable supports. Pull
the cables until the cable connectors are positioned against the appropriate
connectors on the power source. See the following figure for reference.
Figure 4-36: Wall-mounted frame cable routing - left side view
5. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the cable supports.
6. Connect the free ends of the power cables in accordance with the frame
installation plan and the cable tags to the DC power connectors on the
power source.
4-50
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Alarm Cables

The alarm cable is connected to the corresponding ALARMS connector on the
BG-20B.
To connect the alarm cable:
1. Connect the connector of the alarm cable, in accordance with the frame
installation plan and the cable tags, to the ALARMS connector on the
BG-20B.
2. Secure the cable connector to the ALARMS connector with the cable
(maximum blade size 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N cm to 44 N
cm.
3. Bend the cable and route it above the BG-20B and adjacent to the left side
cable supports.
4. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the cable supports.
5. Connect the free ends of the alarm cable in accordance with the frame
installation plan and the cable tags to the customer's facility.
Connecting Optical Fibers

All optical fibers in the BG-20B platform are connected to the LC connectors
on the SFP/XFP transceivers.
Before you start:

characteristics.
426006-2332-013-A04
4-51

Maintenance Manual
To connect an optical fiber to a BG-20B module/card:

1. Insert the end of the fiber into the upper end of the flexible tube and pull it
at the lower end, near the BG-20B.
2. Bring the end of the fiber to the LC connector on the designated
module/card. Leave some slack to prevent stress.
3. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers, using an approved
cleaning kit.
4. Remove the cover from the module/card connector, and connect the fiber
connector to it.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for all optical fibers to be connected to BG-20B
modules/cards.

Cables
Multipair cables are used to connect the balanced E1 (2 Mbps) interfaces
located on the BG-20B or on E1 modules installed in it.
Each cable consists of a total of 21 E1 twisted pairs per cable (transmit or
receive). The cable end connecting to the BG-20B or to the E1 module is
terminated with an appropriate male connector.
To connect multipair cables:
1. Bring the cable connector against the appropriate slot and connect the cable
connector to the corresponding module.
2. Secure the connector to the module connector with the two cable connector
screws. Tighten the screws manually. If the screws cannot be reached with
your bare hand, use an adjustable-torque flatblade screwdriver.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the space above the BG-20B and the
left side of the frame. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the
frame cable supports. See the figure Wall-mounted frame cable routing left side view (page 4-50) for reference.
4. Use a cabling diagram of the frame (or site) to associate module connectors
with the appropriate DDF connections. Cut excess cable length if
necessary.
5. If a DDF is installed in the frame, refer to Wiring the E1 Cables to the DDF
(page 4-17) for connecting the E1 cables to the DDF wiring blocks.
4-52
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual

Individual coaxial cables are used to connect to the interfaces located on
E3/DS-3 and electrical STM-1 modules.
As part of site preparations, suitable cables must be routed from the relevant
High Rate DDF (if used) to the intended frame location and connected to the
coaxial cables with DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors. Leave sufficient length to permit
routing the cables to the appropriate level in the frame.
To connect coaxial traffic cables to E3/DS-3 or STM-1
modules:
1. Pull each coaxial cable to the level of the corresponding electrical
connection module.
2. Connect the DIN 1.0/2.3 connector on the cable to the corresponding
electrical connector on the module.
3. Based on the frame (or site) cabling diagram, arrange the coaxial cables in
groups according to the designated module, and route them along the left
side of the frame.
4. Bend the cables and thread them through the space above the BG-20B and
the left side of the frame. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to
the frame cable supports. See the figure Wall-mounted frame cable routing
- left side view (page 4-50) for reference.
5. Cut excess cable length if necessary.

Timing cables are connected to the T3/T4 connectors of the BG-20B.
To connect a timing cable to the BG-20B platform:
1. Route the timing cable along the side of the frame. Fasten the cable to the
cable supports, using cable ties.
2. Pull the cable down to the level of the T3/T4 connectors and bend it until
the cable connector is positioned against the timing connector.
3. Connect the free end of the cable in accordance with the frame installation
plan and the cable tags to connector T3/T4 on the platform.
4. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the frame cable supports.
426006-2332-013-A04
4-53

Maintenance Manual
Connecting Management Cables

The management cables are connected to the RJ-45 connectors designated
MNG on the BG-20B platform. Each cable is terminated in an RJ-45 plug.
To connect management cables to the BG-20B platform:
1. Bring the cable plug against the appropriate connector on the BG-20B.
2. Connect the management station cable to the MNG connector of the
platform in accordance with the frame installation plan and the cable tags.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the space above the BG-20B and the
left side of the frame.
4. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the frame cable supports.
4-54
426006-2332-013-A04
5
Commissioning Tests
In this chapter:
Test Equipment ................................................................................................ 5-1
Site Commissioning Tests ............................................................................... 5-2
SDH Commissioning Tests ............................................................................. 5-5
Data Network Commissioning Tests ............................................................. 5-11
Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning procedures:
PDH transmission analyzer for testing PDH transmission performance
SDH transmission analyzer for testing SDH transmission performance
Data transmission test equipment for testing FE transmission performance
Optical Power Meter (OPM)
Set of optical attenuators with various values
Variable optical attenuator
FC-to-LC adapters
LC/FC optical patch cords
Multimeter
Suitable equipment is available from a wide range of manufacturers and

therefore no specific models are listed. You can use any equipment that meets
applicable international standards and has satisfactory measurement accuracy
over the range of operating parameters and environmental conditions that apply
to the specific network. If necessary, contact ECI Telecoms Field Engineering
Department for specific recommendations.
426006-2332-013-A04
5-1
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
Site Commissioning Tests

Site commissioning tests verify the normal operation of BG-20 NEs. Perform
the following procedures on each NE at each site:
Verify the cards and modules installed in each platform.
Perform a visual inspection and mechanical checks.
Measure optical levels (see reference data in the BroadGate Product Line
General Description).
Checking Cards and Modules Installed in

Each Shelf
This check is performed to confirm that the required cards and modules have
been installed in each site, and to record their options, revisions, boot version,
and serial numbers.
The following table provides a typical form for recording the cards and
modules installed in a BG-20 shelf.
Table 5-1:
5-2
Card and module inventory
Card/module type
Slot
MXC-20
MS
SMD1
DS
Option
Revision
Boot version
Serial number
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
Visual Inspection and Mechanical Checks

The visual inspection checks for proper equipment installation, correct routing
and connection of cables, and other tasks, as follows:
Equipment installation documents provide the criteria for proper equipment

installation.
The site cabling diagram provides the criteria for proper cabling routing.
After completing the visual inspection tasks (items 1 through 18 in the

following table), power on the BG-20B platform to perform an additional set of
acceptance tests (items 15 through 19 in the following table). These tests check
the functions needed for carrying out the network commissioning tests. Consult
the BroadGate Product Line General Description and the BroadGate Product
Line Reference Manual for a description of the various card indicators and their
functions.
The following table provides a typical list for recording the results of a visual
inspection and mechanical check.
Table 5-2:
No.
Visual inspection and mechanical checks
Description of inspection/check
Check mechanical mounting of the rack.
Check the BG-20B/BG-20E installation; make sure that the

rail stiffeners are properly installed.
Check the ODF and FST installation and fiber connection (if
applicable).
Check the DDF installation and relevant cable connections (if

applicable).
Check ICP_MCP30 installation and relevant cable

connections (if applicable).
Check the grounding cable connections.
Check the DC power cable connections (main fuse to RAP,

RAP fuse to BG-20B/BG-20E platform).
Check the network manager station installation (if applicable).
Check the installation of modules and cards.
10
Check the connection of relevant cables or fibers for all cards

installed.
11
Provide DC supply voltage via the INF_30B or

INF_30BH/INF_30E on slot PSA to the RAP (-40 V to -75
V).
12
Provide DC supply voltage via the INF_30B or

INF_30BH/INF_30E on slot PSB to the RAP (-40 V to -75
V).
13
Power on the platform.
426006-2332-013-A04
Results
5-3
Commissioning Tests
No.

Maintenance Manual
Description of inspection/check
Results
14
Check the proper operation of both RAP power sources by

disconnecting one source at a time.
15
Check the communication between the BG-20B platform and

the LCT-BGF via the MNG Ethernet interface on the MCP30.
16
Check the proper operation of all fans.
17
Check LED operation using the LED TEST option in the

LCT-BGF.
18
Check slot assignment for all relevant cards and modules.
19
Check there are no abnormal alarms.
Measuring Optical Levels

These measurements check optical signal levels at the various equipment ports.
Before performing any other commissioning test, proper optical levels within
the limits specified in the BroadGate Product Line System Specifications must
be achieved for each optical component.
Perform these measurements using an OPM configured according to the
wavelength at the measurement port. For reliable measurement, do not connect
the OPM directly to a port but use a two-meter fiber. When measuring high
optical power levels, use attenuators to ensure that the power does not exceed
the maximum OPM input level.
The following table illustrates a typical data form for optical level
measurements.
Table 5-3:
Slot
5-4
Measured optical levels

Module type
Port
Wavelength
Receive level
Optical
transmit level (dBm)
(dBm)
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
The measured power levels:

Must be within the range of minimum and maximum levels specified in the
BroadGate Product Line General Description for the transceiver plug-in
type installed on the corresponding port.
Must be within the expected range according to the optical network plan.
It is usually sufficient to measure the optical levels at the receive ports only. A
good port-receive level indicates that the components in the optical path up to
that port are properly connected and operating normally. If the result is not
satisfactory, perform additional measurements at the transmit port in the remote
site.
Platform Power-On Test Procedure

To power on the NE:
1. Perform slot assignments for all the relevant cards and modules in the
platform.
2. After 10 seconds, turn the platform circuit breaker off.
3. After 30 seconds, turn the platform circuit breaker on.
The equipment should automatically return to normal operation, without
user intervention and without any abnormal alarms in the system.
SDH Commissioning Tests

These commissioning tests check that SDH functionality is in accordance with
the system specifications.
Test Equipment Setup

The SDH tests are performed using a PDH analyzer, OPM, and variable
attenuators. Configure the OPM according to the measured wavelength.
The test conditions for the various interfaces are described in the following
sections.
Table 5-4:
2 Mbps tests
Framing
Unframed
Coding
HDB3
Pattern
2 * 10-15 PRBS
Signal rate
2 Mbps
Timing
Internal clock
Inject error
Code error
426006-2332-013-A04
5-5
Commissioning Tests
Table 5-5:

Maintenance Manual
34 Mbps tests
Framing
Unframed
Coding
HDB3
Pattern
2 * 10-15 PRBS
Signal rate
34 Mbps
Timing
Internal clock
Inject error
Code error
Table 5-6:
45 Mbps tests
Framing
Unframed
Coding
B3ZS
Pattern
2 * 10-15 PRBS
Signal rate
45 Mbps
Timing
Internal clock
Inject error
Code error
Table 5-7:
SDH tests
For SDH tests, configure the test equipment according to the interface type
being tested.
5-6
Signal rate
STM-1, STM-4
Mapping
Any mapping (preferably bulk)
Pattern
2 * 10-15 PRBS
Signal rate
155.520 Mbps, 622.080 Mbps
Timing
Received clock
Inject error
BIP error
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
Network Timing Synchronization Test

This test checks that the BG-20 NEs synchronize properly and switch to the
next priority clock source when a failure occurs.
To perform network timing synchronization test:
1. Define one NE as the (internal) timing source to which all other NEs are
synchronized. This test can be done with an external timing source, if
requested.
2. Define several priorities for the timing source.
3. Disconnect the Rx fiber connected to the NE defined as the main timing
source.
If the NE has two or more timing sources, it synchronizes to the second priority
source, and an alarm is generated for the missing main timing source.
If the NE has only one timing source, the NE timing is set as hold-over and
an alarm is generated for the main timing source. Another alarm is generated to
indicate that there is no available timing source.
Loss of Signal (LOS) Detection Test

This test verifies that NEs recognize alarms and send an alarm notification to
the management system for viewing.
To perform a LOS detection test:
1. Create NEs and links through the management system.
2. Disconnect the Rx optical fiber from one of the modules. A LOS alarm at
the SPI level of this module port appears, together with other alarms
generated by the disconnection.
426006-2332-013-A04
5-7
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
Input Sensitivity Test

This test verifies that the input sensitivity of the BG-20 optical modules is
according to specifications.
To perform an input sensitivity test:
1. Create one unprotected trail of any rate between two NEs.
2. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE
(in the relevant endpoint ports).
3. Connect a variable optical attenuator to one of the fibers of the relevant
trail, and set the attenuator to 0 dB.
4. Increase the attenuation gradually until the test equipment displays a burst
of errors.
5. Connect an OPM to the first Rx point after the variable optical attenuator
and measure the total power. The measured optical power level is the input
sensitivity of the module.
6. Verify that the results are in accordance with the BroadGate Product Line
System Specifications.
Equipment Power-On Test

This test verifies that the BG-20 NEs continue operating properly after a power
break, without operator involvement.
To perform an equipment power-on test:
3. Shut off the power to one of the nongateway NEs within the relevant trail.
Errors and an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) alarm appear in the test
equipment. After approximately seven minutes, an NE disconnected
alarm appears in the management system current alarm list, and the NE
icon turns gray (indicates no communication).
4. Power on the NE and wait for it to perform the initial download to all
cards/modules in the platform. This can take five minutes.
5. Verify that the NE is connected to the management station and that there
are no relevant alarms in the test equipment or at the management station.
5-8
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
Traffic Stability Test

This test verifies that traffic operates according to ITU-T standards.
To perform traffic stability test:
3. Run this test for the appropriate time interval according to the following
table.
4. Verify that no alarms appear in the test equipment or at the management
station. You should achieve an error-free rate of 1 x 10-11 for 2 Mbps and
1 x 10-12 for all other rates.
Table 5-8:
Traffic stability test time intervals
2 Mbps
34/45 Mbps
STM-1/VC-3
STM-4/VC-12
14 hours
7 hours
120 minutes
30 minutes
Path Protection and Nonretrieval Test

This test verifies that SNCP traffic operates properly when a failure occurs.
To perform a path protection and nonretrieval test:
1. Create one protected trail of any rate between two NEs.
3. Disconnect one of the fibers in the active path of the trail. Short alarm
bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment, and the
management station reports an alarm in the active path of the trail.
4. Verify that the trail works properly on the protection path.
5. Reconnect the optical fiber. The trail remains on the protection path
(nonretrieve mode), and there is no alarm in the test equipment.
426006-2332-013-A04
5-9
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
Severity Assignment Test

This test, which is performed on one BG-20 NE, determines the level of
urgency accorded to each alarm and creates an alarm-handling protocol.
When a fault is detected or removed, the NE updates the status of the LEDs and
reports the alarm activation or clearing to the management station.
To perform a severity assignment test:
1. Disconnect a fiber from one of the optical interfaces. An SPI LOS alarm of
critical severity appears on the management station for the BG-20 and the
MJR LED on the BG-20B panel turns on.
2. Reconnect the fiber. The SPI LOS alarm on the management station clears
and the MJR LED on the BG-20B panel turns off (only if there are no other
alarms on the BG-20 unit).
3. Change the severity of the SPI LOS alarm to minor.
4. Disconnect a fiber from one of the optical interfaces. An SPI LOS alarm of
minor severity appears on the management station for the BG-20 and the
MNR LED on the BG-20B panel turns on (only if there is no critical or
major alarm on the BG-20 unit).
5. Reconnect the fiber. The SPI LOS alarm on the management station clears
and the MNR LED on the BG-20B panel turns off (only if there is no other
alarm on the BG-20 unit).
Transmission Alarm-Handling Test

This test verifies that the BG-20 NEs can recognize an alarm and send an alarm
notification to the management system, and that the management system
displays it properly.
This procedure tests the following alarms: PDH-LOS, PDH-AIS, and SPI-LOS.
To perform a transmission alarm-handling test:
2. Connect PDH test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the
other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports).
3. Disconnect the Tx cable of the test equipment. The management station
reports a LOS alarm for the relevant PDH port.
4. Set the test equipment to transmit an AIS (AIS = on). The management
station reports an AIS alarm for the relevant PDH port.
5. Disconnect the Rx fiber of an optical port. The management station reports
a LOS (SPI-LOS) alarm for the relevant optical port.
If ALS = off, the management station reports a far-end optical port
MS-RDI alarm.
If ALS = on, the management station reports a far-end optical port LOS
alarm.
5-10
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
Maintenance Action Test

This test verifies that maintenance actions can be performed in the BG-20 NEs
using the management system.
This procedure tests a near-end loopback, forced PDH AIS, forced low-rate
RDI, forced high-rate RDI, and forced MS-RDI.
To perform maintenance action test:
2. Connect test equipment to one NE. The PDH test equipment detects an AIS
alarm.
3. Perform a near-end loopback at the other trail endpoint. The AIS alarm in
the PDH test equipment clears, and no alarm or error remains on the PDH
test equipment.
4. Using the management station, execute a forced AIS on the PDH port that
connects to the test equipment. The PDH test equipment detects an AIS
alarm.
5. Using the management station, execute a forced low-rate RDI (or forced
high-rate RDI or forced MS-RDI) on a BG-20 platform. Another BG-20
platform reports a low-rate RDI (or high-rate RDI or MS-RDI) to the
management station.
Data Network Commissioning

Tests
The data network commissioning tests check that data functionality is in
accordance with system specifications.
426006-2332-013-A04
5-11
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
Throughput and Latency Tests

These tests determine the time it takes to transmit frames through the network,
and the maximum amount of data that can pass through the network before
frames are lost.
To perform throughput and latency tests:
1. Create two unprotected Ethernet trails of any rate between two NEs in the
network.
2. Connect test equipment to both ports of one NE and connect two ports of
the other NE through an Ethernet cable.
3. Configure the test equipment for RFC-2544 throughput and latency
measurement.
4. Measure the throughput and latency for frame sizes 64, 128, 256, 512,
1024, 1280, and 1518 bytes, and record the results in the appropriate table.
NOTES:
Table 5-9:
LAN port and
speed
Measured latency is for both the forward and return paths.

For a single path, the latency is 50% of the measured
value.
The latency test is dependent on the throughput results.
For example, if 10 Mbps is tested and the throughput is
4%, the latency test should be for 4 Mbps (2 * VC-12 = 4
Mbps).
Inject traffic according to the assigned bandwidth (VC-12
= 2.048 Mbps).
Throughput and latency test results

64
bytes/
frame
128
bytes/
frame
256
bytes/
frame
512
bytes/
frame
1024 bytes/ 1280

frame
bytes/
frame
1518 bytes/
frame
Throughput
Latency
5-12
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Commissioning Tests
System Recovery and Reset Tests

These tests determine the speed at which a device recovers from a buffer
overflow condition or from a power failure.
To perform system recovery and reset tests:
1. Create two unprotected Ethernet trails of any rate (for example, 10/100
Mbps) between two NEs.
the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports) through an Ethernet cable.
3. Configure the test equipment for manual testing according to the port rate
and for any frame size.
4. Power off one of the NEs and verify packet loss in the test equipment.
5. Turn on the NE, wait five minutes, and verify that the errors in the test
equipment have cleared.
Frame Loss Rate Test

This test determines the number of frames that are lost when the system is
overloaded.
To perform a frame loss rate test:
1. Create two unprotected Ethernet trails between two NEs.
3. Configure the test equipment for RFC-2544 for frame loss measurements.
Set to 100%.
The frame loss rate in % is defined according to the following formula:
[(input fps) - (output fps)] * 100 / (input fps)
fps = frames per second
For example, for a 100 Mbps test using 5 * VC-12 = 10 Mbps, with input
fps = 148810 and output fps = 14881, the frame loss is:
148810 - 14881 = 133929 (a 90% loss).
Table 5-10: Frame loss rate test results
Frame size
64
bytes/
frame
128
bytes/
frame
256
bytes/
frame
512
bytes/
frame
1024 bytes/ 1280

frame
bytes/
frame
1518 bytes/
frame
Frame rate
(% MFR) 100%
426006-2332-013-A04
5-13
Commissioning Tests

Maintenance Manual
Stability Test
This test determines the stability of the network by checking that it can
function with no errors for a defined period of time.
To perform a stability test:
1. Create two unprotected Ethernet trails of any rate (for example,
10/100 Mbps) between two NEs.
3. Configure the test equipment for manual testing according to the port rate
and for any frame size.
4. Set the transmit rate in the test equipment to about 90% of the trail
bandwidth.
5. Run this test for two hours, and verify that no errors appear in the test
equipment.
Alarm-Handling Test
This test checks the alarm conditions forced on the NE and the subsequent
action carried out by the NE. It tests signal loss to both the data LAN port and
to the optical interfaces.
To perform an alarm-handling test:
1. Create two Ethernet trails of any rate (for example, 10/100 Mbps) between
two NEs.
3. Disconnect the test equipment to create a signal loss to the data LAN port.
This generates a 10/100 Mbps - Link Down alarm.
5-14
426006-2332-013-A04
6
Maintenance
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 6-1
Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials ............................................................. 6-1
Preventive Maintenance .................................................................................. 6-2
Onsite Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 6-3
Troubleshooting Power Problems ................................................................... 6-4
Troubleshooting Using Component Indicators ................................................ 6-5
Replacing Cards and Modules ....................................................................... 6-24
Overview
This chapter provides maintenance procedures for BG-20 equipment.
Personnel involved in maintenance must be thoroughly familiar with safety
issues, as described in Before You Start.
Test Equipment, Tools, and

Materials
The only tools required for most maintenance activities described in this
chapter are an LCT-BGF terminal and a multimeter. If you need to make
measurements, it is recommended to use equipment of the same type and
models used for commissioning tests, see Commissioning Tests (page 5-1). The
tools and materials necessary for equipment installation must also be available
during maintenance.
426006-2332-013-A04
6-1
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Preventive Maintenance
The purpose of preventive maintenance activities is to keep the BG-20
hardware in good condition, and detect and correct as soon as possible any
condition that may lead to deterioration and equipment malfunction.
Record the execution of the various activities and their results according to the
procedures used in your organization.
Table 6-1:
Item
Preventive maintenance inspection and checks
Inspection/Check
Intervals*
W
6-2
Visually inspect the condition of cables and fibers.

Check for correct routing (no sharp bends) and proper
support to avoid stress. Avoid touching fibers during
the inspection, except as required to correct problems.
Inspect equipment racks and cases, connection

terminals, grounding, etc. Pay special attention to any
signs of corrosion.
Check the condition of rack front doors and RFI

fingers. Clean as necessary with approved cleaning
agents.
Whenever applicable, inspect ancillary equipment (air

conditioners, lighting, distribution panels, etc.) and
their power sources.
Check that all unused optical connectors are covered by X

protective covers. Add covers as necessary.
Check that cards and modules are securely attached.

All module fastening screws must be tight (tighten only
manually).
Check for proper operation of the fans (no abnormal

noise and vibrations) in all NEs.
Clean all areas around the platform in the rack and the
racks front door (if applicable), using a vacuum
cleaner.
Check that the cables connecting the DC power sources X

(main and backup) to the RAP are properly connected.
10
Check that the external alarm cables are properly

connected to the RAP.
11
Check there are no alarm indications on the cards and

modules.
12
Check that all RAP LEDs turn on and that the buzzer
sounds while the POWER ON pushbutton on the RAP
panel is pressed.
X
X
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Item
Maintenance
Inspection/Check
Intervals*
W
13
Check that all card and module LEDs turn on when

performing the LED TEST operation using the
LCT-BGF.
Note: LEDs for FE interfaces and LEDs for Laser On
indications are not checked by the LED test operation.
14
Perform a visual check of LED indications.
15
Check the proper operation of the OW system (if

applicable to the NE).
* Legend:
W weekly
M monthly
Q quarterly
Onsite Troubleshooting
The purpose of onsite troubleshooting is to identify the hardware causing the
malfunction and return the equipment to normal operation as soon as possible.
Troubleshooting is usually initiated in response to one of the following
conditions:
Alarm or performance degradation reported by the management station.
Alarm or malfunction detected onsite by maintenance personnel, either as a

result of a troubleshooting activity initiated by the management center
personnel or as a result of a periodic inspection or preventive maintenance
action. Many problems can be detected via the various indicators available
on the BG-20 system components.
This chapter assumes familiarity with the BG-20, with SDH data, and with the
LightSoft and EMS-BGF management stations. See the respective user manual
for details on the various capabilities of the management stations and for
instructions on performing the necessary activities.
The following sections provide procedures for performing onsite
troubleshooting for various trouble categories. For each category, a
troubleshooting table provides instructions for identifying the problem.
To use the troubleshooting table:
1. Identify the closest description of the trouble symptoms under
Symptoms.
2. Perform the required corrective actions listed under Corrective actions in
the order they appear, until the trouble is corrected.
426006-2332-013-A04
6-3
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Troubleshooting Power
Problems
Table 6-2:
Troubleshooting power problems
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
RAP
Both main and
POWER
backup power
ON
sources failed
indicator off
Corrective actions
Equipment
problem
All LEDs
No input power to
and fans in the corresponding
BG-20B off unit
6-4
Check the site power distribution

system.
Check the DC voltage at the main and
backup power terminals of the RAP.
If the voltage is not within the correct
range, check cable connections up to
the DC power distribution panel and
make sure no fuses are blown.
Check the voltage supplied by the main
and backup power sources.
Check the power connections to the
RAP.
Check the circuit breakers in the RAP
and replace if necessary.
Check the voltage at the BG-20B,
BG-20E and BG-OW end of each
power cable. Replace the cable or
repair the RAP if there is no voltage
present.
Check and reconnect cables to the
equipment, one by one. If the circuit
breaker trips again when connecting a
specific unit, replace that unit.
Check the corresponding circuit breaker
in the RAP, and reset any tripped
breaker.
Check the circuit breakers in the RAP
and replace if necessary.
If the circuit breaker trips again,
disconnect the cable protected by the
corresponding circuit breaker from the
equipment and check the voltage
polarity.
Check the power cable condition and
make sure the cable is not damaged and
does not cause short circuits.
Check proper cable connection at both
ends.
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Troubleshooting Using
Component Indicators
-+The management station will usually provide onsite personnel with a list of
suspected components.
Start the troubleshooting of a suspected component by checking its indicators.
These indicators, located on the various cards and modules, can help you to
rapidly and efficiently identify a malfunctioning component in accordance with
the procedures outlined in the following tables.
NOTE: For a description of indicator functions, see the
BroadGate Product Line Reference Manual.
CAUTION: The following corrective actions are
traffic-affecting.
Table 6-3:
General troubleshooting procedures for BG-20B/BG-20C power-on
Symptom
Probable cause
Corrective actions
Indicators on MXC20 panel

FAIL
ACT
MJR
MNR
Off
Blink
Off
Boot selection
non-existent or
hardware fault
On
Off
Off
Off
BIT of SDRAM
failed
426006-2332-013-A04
Power off and wait a few

minutes before powering on
again.
Wait a minute at most. The
ACT indicator should flash
and the FAIL indicator
should be off. If not,
replace the BG-20B unit.
again.
6-5
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Symptom
Probable cause
Corrective actions

FAIL
ACT
MJR
MNR
On
Off
On
Off
Boot code not

found by boot
selection
On
Off
Off
Off
BIT of SDRAM
failed
On
Off
Off
On
BIT of Flash
failed
On
Blink
Blink
Blink
Illogical
parameters, such
as the ID or
gateway
6-6

again.
again.
again.
Reset the card. When the
ACT indicator is off and the
MNR indicator flashes after
reset, modify the incorrect
parameters using the Boot
Configuration Tool.
After incorrect parameters
are modified correctly, reset
the card again. The ACT
indicator should flash and
the FAIL indicator should
be off after resetting.
If the FAIL indicator
remains on, replace the
BG-20B unit.
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Symptom
Probable cause
Corrective actions

FAIL
ACT
MJR
MNR
On
Blink
Blink
Off
Nonexecutable
application
software
On
On
On
On
Unsuccessfully
executed
application
software
426006-2332-013-A04

again.
When the ACT indicator is
off and the MNR indicator
flashes after power-on,
download the embedded
software using the Boot
Configuration Tool.
After the embedded
software is completely
downloaded to the card,
power off and then power
on the card again. The ACT
be off after power-on if the
problem is due to a
damaged software bank.
BG-20B unit.
again.
Configuration Tool.
After the embedded
software is completely
downloaded to the card,
power off and then power
on the card again. The ACT
be off after power-on if the
problem is due to a
damaged software bank.
BG-20B unit.
6-7
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Symptom
Probable cause
Corrective actions

FAIL
ACT
MJR
MNR
Blink
Blink
Blink
Blink
FPGA file on
MXC20
downloaded
unsuccessfully
Blink
Blink
Blink
Off
BG-20B
initializes
unsuccessfully
6-8

again.
software package using the
Boot Configuration Tool.
After the embedded
software package is
completely downloaded to
the card, power off and then
power on the card again.
The ACT indicator should
flash and the FAIL
indicator should be off after
power-on if the problem is
due to a damaged software
bank.
BG-20B unit.
again.
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-4:
Maintenance
General troubleshooting procedures for MXC20
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Green ACT
indicator not
flashing, and the
status always on
Damaged software or
defective card
Corrective actions
Green ACT
indicator not
flashing, and the
status always off
426006-2332-013-A04
Defective indicator
Perform a warm reset on

the BG-20B by pressing
the RST button.
If the ACT indicator starts
to flash, keep watching for
five minutes to ensure that
the problem has been
solved.
If the ACT indicator does
not flash, reset the BG-20B
using the LCT-BGF and
Configuration Tool.
If the ACT indicator starts
to flash, keep watching for
five minutes to ensure that
the problem has been
solved.
If the ACT indicator does
not flash, power-off the
BG-20B and wait a minute
before powering it on.
Consult the previous table,
"General troubleshooting
procedures for BG-20B
power-on" for guidance in
resolving the problem.
Select Maintenance > LED

Test in the LCT-BGF menu,
and check that the indicator
blinks for some time. If not,
replace the card/module.
6-9
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Red FAIL indicator Damaged software or

on or not turning
defective card
off after power-on
and resetting
Corrective actions
Left green LED in Link down or defective

the P1-P6 RJ-45 off indicator
6-10
Perform a warm reset on

the BG-20B by pressing
the RST button.
If the FAIL indicator is on,
reset the BG-20B using the
LCT-BGF and download
the embedded software
using the Boot
Configuration Tool.
If the Fail indicator is on,
power-off the BG-20B and
wait a minute before
powering it on.
Consult the previous table,
"General troubleshooting
procedures for BG-20B
power-on" for guidance in
resolving the problem.
No trail on the
corresponding Ethernet
ports indicates a normal
state.
If there are trails on the
corresponding Ethernet
ports, check whether there
are SSF or CSF alarms in
the corresponding Ethernet
trails. If yes, try to find the
reason for the SSF or CSF
problems and solve them,
and check the link status
again.
Make sure the cable
connected to the
corresponding port is not
damaged. Connect the
cable to an Ethernet
analyzer. If a normal signal
is detected, the indicator is
defective or the port is
unavailable. Replace the
BG-20B unit.
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Right orange LED

in the P1-P6 RJ-45
off
10 Mbps link or
defective indicator
Corrective actions
Table 6-5:
General troubleshooting procedures for optical transceiver plug-ins
No.
Symptom
Probable cause
Green transceiver
Laser On indicator
off
SFP module damage
Corrective actions
Incorrect configuration
426006-2332-013-A04
Check the port attributes in

the LCT-BGF. If the speed
status is 10 Mbps, it is in
normal state.
If the speed status in the
LCT-BGF is 100 Mbps, the
BG-20B or indicator is
defective. Replace the
BG-20B unit.
On the LCT-BGF, if the SFP

type cannot be successfully
obtained, the IDPROM of the
SFP module may be damaged.
Replace the module.
If the SFP type information is
consistent with the expected
SFP type, force the laser on
through the LCT-BGF. The laser
on indicator should be on. If not,
the SFP module or the optical
module is damaged. Replace the
damaged module.
On the LCT-BGF, check
whether there is an
SFP-type-mismatch alarm in the
corresponding optical interface.
If yes, check the expected SFP
type first. Correct it if it is not
correct.
Then, check the SFP module
type. If it is not the same as the
expected SFP type, replace the
SFP module with the proper
type.
6-11
Maintenance
No.
6-12

Maintenance Manual
Symptom
Probable cause
Corrective actions
Corresponding optical
transmitter may have
been turned off by the
ALS function (see the
following note)
Check that all the fibers are

properly connected to the
corresponding optical
transceiver.
When available, select
Maintenance > Laser
Management > Laser Switch >
Force Laser On in the
LCT-BGF to activate the
corresponding laser.
Use an OPM to measure the
output optical power. If the
output optical power is not
within the range of minimum
and maximum levels specified
in the BG-20 System
Specifications during a
90-second period, the problem is
in the transmit side of the
transceiver. Remove and reinsert
the transceiver.
Check the output optical power
again. If the output optical
power is still not within the
range of minimum and
maximum levels specified in the
BG-20 System Specifications,
replace the transceiver.
If the problem persists, check
the received optical power with
an OPM. If the optical power is
within the range of minimum
and maximum levels specified
in the BG-20 System
Specifications, replace the
transceiver.
If the problem persists after
following the previous steps,
check the remote site.
If there are no problems on both
sites, the problem may be in the
optical fiber between the two
sites.
NOTE: Be sure to turn on the ALS
function after performing all checks.
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
NOTE: An optical port with ALS capability turns off its

transmitter when the corresponding receive signal is lost.
Turning the transmitter off may cause a chain reaction, which
turns the optical signals off in a whole section of the network
and generates a large number of alarms. As a result, it may be
difficult to identify the real cause of the problem, and you
may need to use the management station log records to
identify the port.
Table 6-6:
Troubleshooting procedures for M345_3 cards
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Green ACT Defective indicator

indicator off
FPGA in module
downloaded
unsuccessfully
Corrective actions
Select Maintenance > LED Test in the

LCT-BGF menu and check that the
indicator blinks for some time. If not,
replace the module.
Defective module
Red FAIL
Defective
indicator on card/module
or not
turning off
after
power-on
and reset
426006-2332-013-A04
Power off and wait a few minutes

before powering on again.
If the Green ACT is still off,
download and activate the NE
embedded software package either
through the LCT-BGF or Boot
Configuration Tool.
After the new embedded software
package is activated, the ACT
indicator should be on and the FAIL
indicator should be off.
If the ACT indicator is still off,
replace the module.
replace the module.
The FAIL indicator is turned on
during running if a BIT fail is
detected. Check the BIT codes using
the LCT-BGF and write them down.
Cold reset the module. If the FAIL
indicator turns on again after
running, replace the module.
6-13
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Orange
Corresponding port
mode
configured to E3
indicator off
Defective indicators
Table 6-7:
cards
Corrective actions
Check with the management station

operator to determine whether the
module has already been configured for
DS-3. If not, ignore the state of the
Mode indicator.
If the port is in DS-3 mode, the indicator
should be on. If not, replace the module.
Troubleshooting procedures for ME1_21/ME1_21H/ME1_42/ME1_42H
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Corrective actions
Green ACT
indicator off
Defective indicator
Select Maintenance > LED Test in

the LCT-BGF menu and check that
the indicator blinks for some time. If
not, replace the module.
FPGA in module
downloaded
unsuccessfully
Defective module
Red FAIL
indicator on or
not turning off
after power-on
and reset
Defective
card/module
6-14

If the Green ACT indicator is still
off, download and activate the
NE embedded software package
either through the LCT-BGF or
indicator should be on and the
FAIL indicator should be off.
replace the module.
Perform a warm reset on the
BG-20B by pushing the RST
button.
If the FAIL indicator is on after
reset, download and activate the
After the software is completely
downloaded to the BG-20B, the
ACT indicator should be on and
the FAIL indicator should be off.
If the FAIL indicator turns on
again, replace the module.
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-8:
Maintenance
Troubleshooting procedures for SMD1/SMD1H/OMS4B/OMS4H cards
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Corrective actions
Green ACT
indicator off
Defective indicator
Select Maintenance > LED Test in

the LCT-BGF menu and check that
the
replace the module.
FPGA in module
downloaded
unsuccessfully
Defective module
Red FAIL
indicator on or
not turning off
after power-on
and reset
Damaged software
or defective
card/module
426006-2332-013-A04

again.
If the Green ACT indicator is
still off, download and activate
the NE embedded software
package either through the
LCT-BGF or the Boot
Configuration Tool.
After the new embedded
software package is activated,
the ACT indicator should be on
and the FAIL indicator should be
off.
replace the module.
Perform a warm reset on the
BG-20B by pushing the RST
button.
If the FAIL indicator is on after
reset, download and activate the
the Boot Configuration Tool.
downloaded to the BG-20B, the
ACT indicator should be on and
the FAIL indicator should be off.
If the FAIL indicator turns on
again, replace the module.
6-15
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-9:
Troubleshooting procedures for MEoP_4/MEoP_4H cards
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause Corrective actions
Green ACT
indicator off
Defective
indicator
FPGA in
module
downloaded
unsuccessfully

replace the module.
Defective
module
Red FAIL
indicator on or
not turning off
after power-on
and reset
Damaged
software or
defective
card/module
6-16

If the Green ACT indicator is still off,
through the LCT-BGF or the Boot
Configuration Tool.
If the ACT indicator is still off, replace
the module.
the BG-20B unit.
Perform a warm reset on the BG-20B
by pushing the RST button.
If the FAIL indicator is on after reset,
Configuration Tool.
downloaded to the BG-20B, the ACT
If the FAIL indicator turns on again,
replace the module.
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
No.
Symptoms
Right green
LED in the FE
P1~FE-P4
RJ-45 off
Link down or
defective
indicator
Left orange
LED in the FE
P1~FE-P4 RJ
45 off
10 Mbps link or
defective
indicator
No trail on the corresponding Ethernet

ports indicates a normal state.
If there are trails on the corresponding
Ethernet ports, check whether there is
a CSF alarm in the corresponding
Ethernet trails.
If yes, try to find the reason for the
CSF problem and resolve it, and check
the link status again.
Make sure the cable connected to the
corresponding port is not damaged.
Connect the cable to an Ethernet
analyzer. If a normal signal is detected,
the indicator is defective or the port is
unavailable. Replace the card.
Check the port attributes in the
LCT-BGF. If the speed status is 10
Mbps, it is in normal state.
If the speed status in the LCT-BGF is
100 Mbps, the BG-20B or indicator is
defective. Replace the card.
Table 6-10: Troubleshooting procedures for MGE_1_L1 cards

No.
Symptoms
Green ACT
indicator off
Defective
indicator

replace the module.
FPGA in
module
downloaded
unsuccessfully

Configuration Tool.
After the new embedded software package
is activated, the ACT indicator should be
on and the FAIL indicator should be off.
Defective
module
426006-2332-013-A04

the module.
the BG-20B unit.
6-17
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
No.
Symptoms
Red FAIL
indicator on or
not turning off
after power-on
and reset
Damaged
software or
defective
card/module
Left green LED Link down or

in the RJ-45
defective
connector is off indicator
Right orange
1000 Mbps link
LED in the
fail or defective
RJ-45
indicator
connector is off
Green
SFP module
transceiver laser damaged
of GbE LAN
indicator off
6-18

by pressing the RST button.
Configuration Tool.
replace the module.
Ethernet trails.
CSF problem, resolve it, and check the
link status again.
analyzer. If a normal signal is detected,
the indicator is defective or the port is
unavailable. Replace the card.
Ethernet ports, check whether the
remote rate is 1000 Mbps.
On the LCT-BGF, Get the current
alarm on SFP. If there is an
SFP-ID-Fail alarm, the IDPROM of
the SFP module may be damaged. You
should replace it.
Force the laser on through the
LCT-BGF. The laser on indicator
should be on. If not, the SFP module
or the optical module is damaged.
Replace the damaged module.
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
Table 6-11: General troubleshooting procedures for extended cards

PE1_63/P345_3E/SM_10E/ESW_2G_8F_/MPS_2G_8F_E/S1_4)
No.
Symptoms
Both red FAIL Boot damaged

indicator and
red Alarm
indicator do not
turn off after
power-on
Extract the card and reinsert it into the

extended slot on the BG-20E. If this does
not resolve the problem, replace the
module.
Green ACT
indicator off

replace the module.
Defective
indicator
FPGA in
module
downloaded
unsuccessfully
Defective
module
Red FAIL
indicator on or
not turning off
after power-on
and reset
Embedded
software and
FPGA not
downloaded
426006-2332-013-A04

Configuration Tool.
the module.
the BG-20B unit.
If the Red FAIL indicator is still on,
Configuration Tool.
6-19
Maintenance
No.

Maintenance Manual
Symptoms
Damaged
software or
defective
card/module

by pushing the RST button.
Configuration Tool.
replace the module.
Table 6-12: Special troubleshooting procedures for P345_3E cards

No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Corrective actions
Orange mode
indicator off
Corresponding
port configured
to E3
Check with the management station

operator to determine whether the module
has already been configured for DS-3. If
not, ignore the state of the Mode indicator.
Defective
indicators
If the port is in DS-3 mode, the indicator

should be on. If not, replace the module.
Table 6-13: Special troubleshooting procedures for ESW_2G_8F_E cards

No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Right green
Link down or
LED in the
defective indicator
FE-P1~FE-P8
RJ-45 off
Corrective actions
6-20
No trail on the corresponding

Ethernet ports indicates a normal
state.
If there are trails on the
corresponding Ethernet ports, check
whether there is a CSF alarm in the
corresponding Ethernet trails.
CSF problems and resolve it, and
check the link status again.
analyzer. If a normal signal is
detected, the indicator is defective or
the port is unavailable. Replace the
card.
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
No.
Symptoms
Left orange
10 Mbps link or
LED in the
defective indicator
FE-P1~FE-P8
RJ- 45 off
Green
transceiver
Laser of
GE-LAN
indicator off
Probable cause
Corrective actions
SFP module
damaged
Incorrect
configuration

LCT-BGF. If the speed status is 10
Mbps, it is in normal state.
If the speed status in the LCT-BGF
is 100 Mbps, the BG-20B or
indicator is defective. Replace the
card.
On the LCT-BGF, if the SFP type
cannot be successfully obtained, the
IDPROM of the SFP module may be
damaged. Replace the SFP module.
If the SFP type information is
consistent with the expected SFP
type, force the laser on through the
LCT-BGF. The laser on indicator
should be on. If not, the SFP module
or the optical module is damaged.
Replace the damaged module.
On the LCT-BGF, check whether
there is an SFP-type-mismatch alarm
in the corresponding optical
interface.
If yes, check the expected SFP type
first. Correct it if it is not right.
Then check the SFP module type. If
it is not the same as the expected
SFP type, replace the SFP module
with the proper type.
Table 6-14: General troubleshooting procedures for daughterboards on SM_10E

cards
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Green ACT
indicator off
after power-on
or reset
Defective indicator
or defective
daughterboard
Corrective actions
Check whether the SM_10E card is

running, meaning that the ACT LED
is blinking. If yes, extract the
daughterboard and reinsert it again.
If the Green ACT indicator does not
turn on too, replace the
daughterboard.
Defective Dslot on If replacing the daughterboard does not

SM_10E
resolve the problem, replace the SM_10E
card.
2
Red FAIL
indicator on
after power-on
or reset
426006-2332-013-A04
BIT fail
Replace the module.
6-21
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Table 6-15: Special troubleshooting procedures for SM_EOP daughterboards

No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Left green LED

in the Port 1 or
Port 2 RJ-45 off
Link down or
defective indicator
Corrective actions
Right orange
LED in the
Port 1 or Port 2
RJ-45 off
10 Mbps link or
defective indicator
No trail on the corresponding

Ethernet ports indicates a normal
state.
Ethernet trails.
CSF problem and resolve it, and
check the link status again.
analyzer. If a normal signal is
detected, the indicator is defective or
the port is unavailable. Replace the
card.
LCT-BGF. If the speed status is
10 Mbps, it is in normal state.
If the speed status in the LCT-BGF is
100 Mbps, the indicator is defective.
Replace the card.
Table 6-16: Special troubleshooting procedures for OW box

No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Green ACT
indicator off
Power failure
Corrective actions
Defective indicator
6-22
Both ACT and Fail S/W on OW box is

Indicators blink
damaged

minutes before powering
on again.
If the indicator is still off,
replace the OW box

replace the OW box.
Replace OW box
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
No.
Symptoms
Probable cause
Red FAIL indicator Connection between

is on
OW and BG-20B
failure or faulty OW
box
Corrective actions
Defective indicator
Green In Use
indicator is off
OW phone is not in use
Defective indicator
426006-2332-013-A04
Check the alarms on the

OW through LCT-BGF.
If there is Card-out alarm,
check the connection
between BG-20B and the
OW box, and try to solve it
by reconnecting the cable
or replacing the cable.
If there is a BIT-fail alarm,
replace the OW box.

replace the OW box.
If the OW phone is on
hook, the indicator should
be off, it is normal. Pick
the phone up, the indicator
should be on.

replace the OW box.
6-23
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Replacing Cards and Modules

Safety and Workmanship
Refer to Before You Start for safety and workmanship instructions.
CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices
PROPER HANDLING AND GROUNDING
PRECAUTIONS REQUIRED
BG-20 equipment contains components sensitive to ESD. To
prevent ESD damage, strictly observe all the precautions
listed in Protection Against ESD (see "Protection Against
Electrostatic Discharge" page 2-23). Keep parts and cards in
their antistatic packaging material until you are ready to
install them.
Use an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded
equipment frame or rack when handling cards and modules
during installation, removal, or connection to internal
connectors.
Before you start:

When inserting cards and modules, be sure to carefully align the card/module
with the platform guide rails. If you feel resistance during insertion,
immediately retract the card/module and repeat the process.
Hold the card/module straight during insertion and removal, and pull or push it
slowly and carefully to avoid touching components located on adjacent
cards/modules.
Do not use excessive torque when tightening the fastening screws of cards and
modules.
Visually inspect the card and the mating backplane connectors and make sure
that there are no signs of physical damage. In particular, check for bent
connector pins.
Before replacing any card, module, or optical transceiver:
1. Check that the replacement component has not been physically damaged
during shipment.
2. Remove the replacement component from its antistatic protection
packaging, and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during
shipment. Report any problems.
3. Record the hardware and software versions as indicated on the component
identification labels, and make sure they are compatible with those of the
component to be replaced.
6-24
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
After replacing a component:

1. Place it in its antistatic protection packaging and close it.
2. Attach a report to the packaging explaining the reason for the replacement,
and identify the network site, physical location, platform, and time of
replacement.
Replacing Dslot Modules

This section provides replacement instructions for Dslot modules in the
BG-20B shelf.
CAUTION: Replace the Dslot modules as rapidly as possible.
Because the BG-20B unit must be powered off before
replacing a Dslot module, management, T3/T4
synchronization, and all traffic on the NE are not possible.
To replace a Dslot module in the BG-20B shelf:

1. Mark each cable connected to the Dslot module for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the Dslot module.
3. Power off the BG-20B unit.
4. Loosen and remove the two screws.
5. Hold the handle on the Dslot module panel and pull the module to be
replaced outward until it is released from the backplane.
6. Continue to hold the handles and gently pull the module out of the shelf.
7. Insert the rear end of the replacement module into the corresponding
module guides.
8. Push the replacement module in until the front panel of the module is flush
with the front of the BG-20B shelf. If resistance is felt before the
connectors are flush, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.
9. Close the screws on the panel to fasten the module to the BG-20B shelf.
10. Power on the BG-20B unit.
11. Reconnect all cables for the Dslot module according to the cable marks.
426006-2332-013-A04
6-25
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
Replacing Eslot Cards

NOTE: All Eslot cards support live insertion. There is no
need to power-off the BG-20B or the BG-20E units when
replacing them.
To replace an Eslot card in the BG-20E platform:
1. Mark each cable connected to the Eslot card for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the Eslot card.
4. Hold the handles on the Eslot card panel and pull the module to be replaced
outward until it is released from the backplane.
5. Continue to hold the handles and gently pull the module out of the
platform.
module guides.
with the front of the BG-20E platform. If resistance is felt before the
8. Close the screws on the panel to fasten the module to the BG-20E platform.
9. Reconnect all cables for the Eslot card according to the cable marks.
Replacing Traffic Modules on the SM_10E

NOTE: All traffic modules on the SM_10E support live
insertion. There is no need to extract the SM_10E card when
replacing a module.
To replace a traffic module on the SM_10E:
1. Mark each cable connected to the traffic module on the SM_10E card for
identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the traffic module.
4. Hold the handles on the traffic module panel and pull the module to be
replaced outward until it is released from the SM_10E card.
5. Continue to hold the handle and gently pull the module out of the card.
module guides.
6-26
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Maintenance
with the front of the SM_10E card. If resistance is felt before the
8. Close the screws on the panel to fasten the module to the SM_10E card.
9. Reconnect all cables for the traffic module according to the cable marks.
Replacing ICPs for the SM_10E

To replace an ICP for the SM_10E:
1. Mark each cable connected to the ICP for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the ICP.
3. Loosen and remove the four screws.
4. Replace the ICP and close the screws to fasten the ICP to the platform.
5. Reconnect all cables for the ICP according to the cable marks.
Replacing Power Modules

CAUTION:
If using a DC power supply, each BG-20B/BG-20E

platform has two power modules. Replacing the power
module therefore does not cause the NE to power off.
Replace INF_30 modules one at a time so that the system
is not powered off.
To replace the power module:

1. Cut off the power source connected to the power module by turning off the
corresponding power switch on the RAP.
2. Disconnect the power cable from the replaced power module on the panel.
3. Open the two screws fastening the power module to the platform.
4. Hold the handle on the panel and pull the module to be replaced outward
until it is released from the backplane.
5. Continue to hold the handles and gently pull the module out of the
platform.
module guides.
with the front of the BG-20B or BG-20E platform. If resistance is felt
before the connectors are flush, pull the module out and repeat the
procedure.
426006-2332-013-A04
6-27
Maintenance

Maintenance Manual
8. Close the screws on the panel to fasten the module to the BG-20B or
BG-20E platform.
9. Reconnect the power cable to the replacement power module.
10. Turn on the power switch on the RAP.
Replacing SFP/XFP Transceivers

ECI Telecom supplies field-replaceable SFP/XFP transceivers in all optical
interfaces and electrical STM-1 interfaces. Hot swapping is allowed, provided
you observe all the safety precautions described in Before You Start during the
replacement.
To replace an SFP/XFP transceiver:
1. Mark each fiber or cable connected to the transceiver for identification
purposes.
2. Identify the position of the SFP/XFP transceiver to be replaced.
3. Disconnect the fibers or cables connected to the transceiver.
4. Remove the transceiver plug-in by pulling its tab.
5. Insert the rear end of the replacement transceiver plug-in into the prescribed
position, and push slowly backward to mate its rear connector with the
corresponding optical interface module connector until the transceiver
clicks into place. If you feel resistance before the transceiver plug-in is
fully inserted, retract the transceiver and repeat the insertion.
6. Reconnect the fibers or cables disconnected in Step 3.
6-28
426006-2332-013-A04
A
Connection Data
In this appendix:
Overview ........................................................................................................ A-2
INF_20B/INF_20E DC Input Power Connectors ........................................... A-2
AC_CONV_20B/AC_CONV_20E AC Input Power Connectors .................. A-2
MNG Ethernet Connector ............................................................................... A-3
T3/T4 Timing Connector ................................................................................ A-4
RS-232 Connector .......................................................................................... A-5
Orderwire Connector ...................................................................................... A-6
V.11 Overhead Connector .............................................................................. A-7
Alarms Connector ........................................................................................... A-8
E1 Connectors on MXC20 (L91 Cable) ......................................................... A-9
E1 Connectors on MXC20 (L115 Cable) ..................................................... A-14
E1 Connectors on ME1_21 and ME1_42 ..................................................... A-19
Fast Ethernet Interface Connectors............................................................... A-24
M345_3 Card Connection Data .................................................................... A-24
MGE_1_L1 Card Connection Data .............................................................. A-24
P345_3E Card Connection Data ................................................................... A-25
PE1_63 Card Connection Data ..................................................................... A-25
ESW_2G_8F_E Card Connection Data........................................................ A-26
MPS_2G_8F Card Connection Data ............................................................ A-26
SM_10E Card Connection Data ................................................................... A-26
ICP_VF Connection Data ............................................................................. A-39
ICP_V24 Connection Data ........................................................................... A-40
ICP_V35 Connection Data ........................................................................... A-43
ICP_V11_V24 Connection Data .................................................................. A-44
ICP_DB37D Connection Data...................................................................... A-46
RAP-4B Connectors ..................................................................................... A-50
426006-2332-013-A04
A-1
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Overview
This appendix provides connection data for the user connectors located in the
BG-20B and BG-20E shelves and associated ancillary equipment supplied by
ECI Telecom.
Any connectors not described in this appendix are reserved for use by ECI
Telecom technical support personnel and/or for future expansion, and therefore
no user equipment may be connected to them.
INF_20B/INF_20E DC Input
Power Connectors
The DC input power connectors, designated POWER IN A and POWER IN B,
are 3-pin D-type male connectors located on the INF_20B/INF_20E panel. The
following figure identifies the functions of the POWER IN connector pins, as
Figure A-1: PW-9300-1RU-DC input power connectors, pin function
AC_CONV_20B/AC_CONV_20E
AC Input Power Connectors
AC input power connectors are located on the
AC_CONV_20B/AC_CONV_20E front panel, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure A-2: AC input power connectors
A-2
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
MNG Ethernet Connector

The Ethernet connector located on the BG-20B panel, designated MNG, is an
eight-pin RJ-45 connector that provides an Ethernet 10BaseT management
interface.
The Ethernet connector is wired as a station port intended for direct connection
through a straight cable to a port of a 10BaseT Ethernet hub.
The following figure identifies the connector pins, as seen when looking into
the connector. The following table lists the pin assignment for a typical
connector.
Figure A-3: Ethernet connector, PIN identification

Table A-1: Ethernet connector, pin assignment
Pin
Designation
Function
Direction
TX+
Transmit, + wire
Output
TX-
Transmit, - wire
Output
RX+
Receive, + wire
Output
4,5
N/C
Not connected
Output
RX-
Receive, - wire
Output
NC
Not connected
Output
N/C
Not connected
Output
426006-2332-013-A04
A-3
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
T3/T4 Timing Connector

The T3/T4 timing connector is an RJ-45 connector located on the MCP30 panel
and designated T3/T4. The interface includes a group of lines that are usually
connected to the site timing reference distribution subsystem:
Clock input (T3 2.048 Mbps or 2.048 MHz signal, ITU-T Rec. G.703
interface)
Clock output (T4 2.048 Mbps or 2.048 MHz signal, ITU-T Rec. G.703
interface)
the connector. The table lists the pin assignment for the connector. It also lists
the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered
by ECI Telecom for connecting between the tributary connector and a
distribution frame.
Figure A-4: T3/T4 connector, pin identification

Table A-2: T3/T4 connector, PIN identification
A-4
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CLK2MHZ_IN(A)
2 MHz clock input
Input
Blue
CLK2MHZ_IN(B)
Input
White/Blue
CLK2MHZ_OUT(A)
2 MHz clock output Output
CLK2MHZ_OUT(B)
Output
White/Green
CLK2MBIT_IN(A)
Input
Brown
CLK2MBIT_IN(B)
Input
White/Brown
CLK2MBIT_OUT(A)
Output
Orange
CLK2MBIT_OUT(B)
Output
White/Orange
2 Mbps clock input

2 Mbps clock
output
Green
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
RS-232 Connector
One RS-232 connector provides a debug RS-232 interface; it's an RJ-45
connector located on the ICP_MCP30 panel and designated RS-232.
The following figure shows an RS-232 cable from the RJ-45 connector to the
DB-9 female connector. The table lists the connector pin assignment for both
the RJ-45 connector and the DB-9 connector, when using the RS-232 cable
supplied by ECI Telecom.
Figure A-5: RS-232 overhead connectors, pin identification
Figure A-6: RS-232 overhead cable
Figure A-7: RS-232 overhead cable label
426006-2332-013-A04
A-5
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Table A-3: RS-232 connectors, pin assignment

Pin in RJ-45
Name
Function
Direction
Pin in DB-9
COM-TX
Channel transmit
Output
GND
Ground
---
3, 4, 5, 6
---
Not connected
---
---
COM-RX
Channel receive
Input
GND
Ground
---
---
Orderwire Connector
The OW connector is an RJ-45 connector that is located on the BG-20B panel
and designated as OW. The interface includes a pair of E1 balanced interfaces
that is connected to an RJ-45 connector on the BG-OW front panel.
the connector. The following table lists the pin assignment for the orderwire
connector at both the BG-20B and BG-OW ends, when using the OW cable
supplied by ECI Telecom.
Table A-4: OW connector, pin assignment
Pin (in BG-20B
A-6
Name
Function
Direction
OW_IN(A)
Orderwire input
Input
OW_IN(B)
Input
OW_OUT(A)
Orderwire output Output
OW_OUT(B)
Output
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Pin (in BG-OW)
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
V.11 Overhead Connector

The V.11 overhead connector is a 15-pin D-type female connector on the
BG-20B panel that provides a V.11 overhead interface.
the connector. The following table lists the connector pin assignment.
Figure A-8: V.11 connector, pin identification

Table A-5: V.11 overhead connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
V11_RCLK(-)
Receive timing A
To DTE
Brown
V11_TCLK(-)
Transmit timing A
To DTE
Red
V11_RXD(-)
Receive data A
To DTE
Orange
V11_TTCLK(-)
Terminal timing A
From DTE
Yellow
V11_TXD(-)
Transmit data A
From DTE
Green
V11_RCLK(+)
Receive timing B
To DTE
Brown/Gray ring
V11_TCLK(+)
Transmit timing B
To DTE
Red/Gray ring
V11_RXD(+)
Receive data B
To DTE
Orange/Gray ring
V11_TTCLK(+)
Terminal timing B
From DTE
Yellow/Gray ring
10
V11_TXD(+)
Transmit data B
From DTE
Green/Gray ring
11
---
Not connected
---
---
12
---
Not connected
---
---
13
---
Not connected
---
---
14
GND
Ground
---
Blue
15
CGND
Chassis ground
---
Drain wire (braided)
426006-2332-013-A04
A-7
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Alarms Connector
The Alarms connector, designated ALARMS, is a 15-pin D-type male
connector on the BG-20B panel that provides an alarm interface connecting to
the RAP. The connector supports two groups of lines:
Four external alarm input lines. The alarm input lines are monitored by the
BG-20 management subsystem. Each input is connected to the input diode
of an optocoupler.
Three alarm output lines. Each output is provided by a relay dry contact.
Relay contact ratings are 75 V in open state and 1 A in closed state.

The ALARMS connector can be connected in one of the following
configurations:
Direct connection to a customers alarms collection facilities
Connection to the RAP
ECI Telecom offers appropriate cables for each of these configurations.

the connector. The following table lists the connector pin assignment.
Figure A-9: Alarms connector, pin identification

Table A-6: Alarms connector, pin assignment
Pin
A-8
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
ALARM_IN1(A)
First alarm input
Input
Brown
ALARM_IN1(B)
Input
Brown/Gray ring
ALARM_IN2(A)
Input
Red
ALARM_IN2(B)
Input
Red/Gray ring
ALARM_IN3(A)
Input
Orange
ALARM_IN3(A)
Input
Orange/Gray ring
ALARM_IN4(A)
Input
Yellow
ALARM_IN4(B)
Input
Yellow/Gray ring
11
ALARM_OUT1(A)
Output
Blue
12
ALARM_OUT1(B)
Output
Blue/Gray ring
Second alarm input

Third alarm input
Fourth alarm input
First alarm output
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Connection Data
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
13
ALARM_OUT2(A)
Second alarm output
Output
Violet
14
ALARM_OUT2(B)
Output
Violet/Gray ring
ALARM_OUT3(A)
Third alarm output,

common
Output
Green
10
ALARM_OUT3(B1)
Third alarm output,

normally closed
Output
Green/Gray ring
15
ALARM_OUT3(B2)
Third alarm output,

normally open
Output
White
E1 Connectors on MXC20 (L91

Cable)
The MXC20 provides 21 balanced E1 tributary interfaces and has two 50-pin
SCSI female connectors. The upper connector, designated as E1 (12-21), serves
the 10 E1 receive and transmit signals and the lower connector, designated as
E1 (1-11), serves the 11 E1 receive and transmit signals. The same cable is
used for both the upper and lower connectors.
the connector. The following tables list the pin assignment for a typical
connector. They also list the color of the wire connected to the corresponding
pin in the cable offered by ECI Telecom for connecting between the tributary
connector and a distribution frame.
IMPORTANT: In past versions of the BG-20B (up to V11)
the connection to the E1 interfaces on the MXC20 was made
with two separate cables, each with a SCSI 50-pin connector
at the end and the same wiring configuration, as described in
the tables below. This cable is designated L91. Starting V12
of the BG-20B the connection to the E1 interfaces is made
with a pair of cables attached together which have two, SCSI
50-pin, connectors at their edges. This cable is designated
L115 and described in E1 Connectors on MXC20 (L115
Cable) (page A-14).
NOTE: ECI Telecom recommends using the L115 cable for
connecting the E1 interfaces on the MXC20.
426006-2332-013-A04
A-9
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Figure A-10: E1 connectors for MXC20, pin identification

Table A-7: 1-11 E1 connector (lower), pin assignment
A-10
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
TTIP1
Transmit, tributary 1, wire A
Output
Blue/White ring
TRING1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire B
Output
White/Blue ring
TTIP2
Output
Orange/White ring
Output
White/Orange ring
TTIP3
Output
White/Green ring
Output
Green/White ring
---
Not connected
---
---
---
Not connected
---
---
---
Not connected
---
---
10
TTIP4
Output
Brown/White ring
11
TTIP4
Transmit, tributary 4, wire B
Output
White/Brown ring
12
TTIP5
Output
Light Blue/White ring
13
Output
White/Light Blue ring
14
TTIP6
Output
Blue/Red ring
15
Output
Red/Blue ring
16
TTIP7
Output
Orange/Red ring
17
Output
Red/Orange ring
18
TTIP8
Output
Green/Red ring
19
Output
Red/Green ring
20
TTIP9
Output
Brown/Red ring
21
Output
Red/Brown ring
22
TTIP10
Transmit, tributary 10, wire A Output
Light Blue/Red ring
23
TRING1 Transmit, tributary 10, wire B Output

0
Red/Light Blue ring
24
TTIP11
Blue/Black ring

426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Connection Data
Direction
Wire color
25
TRING1 Transmit, tributary 11, wire B Output

1
Black/Blue ring
26
RTIP1
Receive, tributary 1, wire A
Input
Orange/Black ring
27
RRING1 Receive, tributary 1, wire B
Input
Black/Orange ring
28
RTIP2
Input
Green/Black ring
29
Input
Black/Green ring
30
RTIP3
Input
Brown/Black ring
31
Input
Black/Brown ring
32
---
Not connected
---
---
33
---
Not connected
---
---
34
---
Not connected
---
---
35
RTIP4
Input
Light Blue/Black ring
36
Input
Black/Light Blue ring
37
RTIP5
Input
Blue/Yellow ring
38
Input
Yellow/Blue ring
39
RTIP6
Input
Light Gray/Brown ring
40
Input
Pink/Brown ring
41
RTIP7
Input
Brown/Red ring
42
Input
Light Gray/Red ring
43
RTIP8
Input
Yellow/Red ring
44
Input
Green/Red ring
45
RTIP9
Input
Blue/Red ring
46
Input
Violet/Red ring
47
RTIP10
Input
White/Red ring
48

0
Input
Pink/Red ring
49
RTIP11
Input
Brown/Green ring
50

1
Input
Light Gray/Green ring
426006-2332-013-A04
A-11
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Table A-8: 12-21 E1 connector (upper), pin assignment

Pin
A-12
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
TTIP12
Transmit, tributary 12,

wire A
Output
Blue/White ring
TRING1 Transmit, tributary 12,

2
wire B
Output
White/Blue ring
TTIP13

wire A
Output
Orange/White ring

3
wire B
Output
White/Orange ring
NC
Not used
---
White/Green ring
NC
Not used
---
Green/White ring
---
Not connected
---
---
---
Not connected
---
---
---
Not connected
---
---
10
TTIP14

wire A
Output
Brown/White ring
11
TTIP14

wire B
Output
White/Brown ring
12
TTIP15

wire A
Output
Light Blue/White ring
13

5
wire B
Output
White/Light Blue ring
14
TTIP16

wire A
Output
Blue/Red ring
15

6
wire B
Output
Red/Blue ring
16
TTIP17

wire A
Output
Orange/Red ring
17

7
wire B
Output
Red/Orange ring
18
TTIP18

wire A
Output
Green/Red ring
19

8
wire B
Output
Red/Green ring
20
TTIP19

wire A
Output
Brown/Red ring
21

9
wire B
Output
Red/Brown ring
22
TTIP20

wire A
Output
Light Blue/Red ring
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Connection Data
Direction
Wire color
23

0
wire B
Output
Red/Light Blue ring
24
TTIP21

wire A
Output
Blue/Black ring
25

1
wire B
Output
Black/Blue ring
26
RTIP12
Receive, tributary 12, wire

A
Input
Orange/Black ring
27
RRING1 Receive, tributary 12, wire

2
B
Input
Black/Orange ring
28
RTIP13

A
Input
Green/Black ring
29

3
B
Input
Black/Green ring
30
NC
Not used
---
Brown/Black ring
31
NC
Not used
---
Black/Brown ring
32
---
Not connected
---
---
33
---
Not connected
---
---
34
---
Not connected
---
---
35
RTIP14

A
Input
Light Blue/Black ring
36

4
B
Input
Black/Light Blue ring
37
RTIP15

A
Input
Blue/Yellow ring
38

5
B
Input
Yellow/Blue ring
39
RTIP16

A
Input
40

6
B
Input
Pink/Brown ring
41
RTIP17

A
Input
Brown/Red ring
42

7
B
Input
Light Gray/Red ring
43
RTIP18

A
Input
Yellow/Red ring
44

8
B
Input
Green/Red ring
45
RTIP19

A
Input
Blue/Red ring
426006-2332-013-A04
A-13
Connection Data
Pin

Maintenance Manual
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
46

9
B
Input
Violet/Red ring
47
RTIP20

A
Input
White/Red ring
48

0
B
Input
Pink/Red ring
49
RTIP21

A
Input
Brown/Green ring
50

1
B
Input
E1 Connectors on MXC20 (L115

Cable)
The MXC20 provides 21 balanced E1 tributary interfaces and has two 50-pin
SCSI female connectors. The upper connector, designated as E1 (12-21), serves
the 10 E1 receive and transmit signals and the lower connector, designated as
E1 (1-11), serves the 11 E1 receive and transmit signals.
pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting between the tributary
IMPORTANT: In past versions of the BG-20B (up to V11)
the connection to the E1 interfaces on the MXC20 was made
with two separate cables, each with a SCSI 50-pin connector
at the edge and the same wiring configuration. This cable is
designated L91 and described in E1 Connectors on MXC20
(L91 Cable) (page A-9). Starting V12 of the BG-20B the
connection to the E1 interfaces is made with a pair of cables
attached together, which have two, SCSI 50-pin, connectors
at their edges. This cable is designated L115 and described
below.
NOTE: ECI Telecom recommends using the L115 cable for

connecting the E1 interfaces on the MXC20.
A-14
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Figure A-11: E1 connectors for MXC20, pin identification

Table A-9: 1-11 E1 connector (lower), pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
TTIP1
Output
Orange/White ring
Output
Yellow/White ring
TTIP2
Output
Brown/White ring
Output
Red/White ring
TTIP3
Output
Pink
Output
Pink/Gray ring
---
Not connected
---
---
---
Not connected
---
---
---
Not connected
---
---
10
TTIP4
Output
White
11
TTIP4
Output
White/Gray ring
12
TTIP5
Output
Violet
13
Output
Violet/Gray ring
14
TTIP6
Output
Blue
15
Output
Blue/Gray ring
16
TTIP7
Output
Green
17
Output
Green/Gray ring
18
TTIP8
Output
Yellow
19
Output
Yellow/Gray ring
20
TTIP9
Output
Orange
21
Output
Orange/Gray ring
22
TTIP10
Output
Red
23

0
Output
Red/Gray ring
24
TTIP11
Output
Brown
426006-2332-013-A04
A-15
Connection Data
Pin
A-16
Name

Maintenance Manual
Function
Direction
Wire color
25

1
Output
Brown/Gray ring
26
RTIP1
Input
Brown/Green ring
27
Input
28
RTIP2
Input
White/Red ring
29
Input
Pink/Red ring
30
RTIP3
Input
Blue/Red ring
31
Input
Violet/Red ring
32
---
Not connected
---
---
33
---
Not connected
---
---
34
---
Not connected
---
---
35
RTIP4
Input
Yellow/Red ring
36
Input
Green/Red ring
37
RTIP5
Input
Brown/Red ring
38
Input
Light Gray/Red ring
39
RTIP6
Input
40
Input
Pink/Brown ring
41
RTIP7
Input
Blue/Brown ring
42
Input
Violet/Brown ring
43
RTIP8
Input
Orange/Brown ring
44
Input
Green/Brown ring
45
RTIP9
Input
Red/Brown ring
46
Input
Yellow/Brown ring
47
RTIP10
Input
Violet/White ring
48

0
Input
Light Gray/White ring
49
RTIP11
Input
Green/White ring
50

1
Input
Blue/White ring
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Table A-10: 12-21 E1 connector (upper), pin assignment

Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
TTIP12

wire A
Output
Blue/Orange ring
TRING12

wire B
Output
Violet/Orange ring
TTIP13

wire A
Output
Light Gray/Orange ring
TRING13

wire B
Output
White/Orange ring
NC
Not used
---
---
NC
Not used
---
---
---
Not connected
---
---
---
Not connected
---
---
---
Not connected
---
---
10
TTIP14

wire A
Output
Brown/Violet ring
11
TRING14

wire B
Output
Red/Violet ring
12
TTIP15

wire A
Output
Orange/Violet ring
13
TRING15

wire B
Output
Yellow/Violet ring
14
TTIP16

wire A
Output
Green/Violet ring
15
TRING16

wire B
Output
Blue/Violet ring
16
TTIP17

wire A
Output
Light Gray/Violet ring
17
TRING17

wire B
Output
White/Violet ring
18
TTIP18

wire A
Output
Brown/Pink ring
19
TRING18

wire B
Output
Red/Pink ring
20
TTIP19

wire A
Output
Orange/Pink ring
21
TRING19

wire B
Output
Yellow/Pink ring
22
TTIP20

wire A
Output
Green/Pink ring
426006-2332-013-A04
A-17
Connection Data
Pin
A-18

Maintenance Manual
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
23
TRING20

wire B
Output
Blue/Pink ring
24
TTIP21

wire A
Output
Light Gray /Pink ring
25
TRING21

wire B
Output
White/Pink ring
26
RTIP12

A
Input
Brown/Yellow ring
27
RRING12

B
Input
Red/Yellow ring
28
RTIP13

A
Input
Orange/Yellow ring
29
RRING13

B
Input
Green/Yellow ring
30
NC
Not used
---
---
31
NC
Not used
---
---
32
---
Not connected
---
---
33
---
Not connected
---
---
34
---
Not connected
---
---
35
RTIP14

A
Input
Blue/Yellow ring
36
RRING14

B
Input
Violet/Yellow ring
37
RTIP15

A
Input
Light Gray/Yellow ring
38
RRING15

B
Input
White/Yellow ring
39
RTIP16

A
Input
Brown/Blue ring
40
RRING16

B
Input
Red/Blue ring
41
RTIP17

A
Input
Orange/Blue ring
42
RRING17

B
Input
Yellow/Blue ring
43
RTIP18

A
Input
Green/Blue ring
44
RRING18

B
Input
Violet/Blue ring
45
RTIP19

A
Input
Light Gray/Blue ring
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Connection Data
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
46
RRING19

B
Input
White/Blue ring
47
RTIP20

A
Input
Brown/Orange ring
48
RRING20

B
Input
Red/Orange ring
49
RTIP21

A
Input
Yellow/Orange ring
50
RRING21

B
Input
Green/Orange ring
E1 Connectors on ME1_21 and

ME1_42
The ME1_21 provides 21 balanced E1 tributary interfaces and has twin 68-pin
VHDCI female connectors. The ME1_42 provides 42 balanced E1 tributary
interfaces and has two twin 68-pin VHDCI female connectors. Each twin
68-pin VHDCI connector serves the 21 E1 receive and transmit signals.
pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting between the tributary
Figure A-12: E1 connectors for ME1_21 and ME1_42, pin identification
426006-2332-013-A04
A-19
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Table A-11: ME1_21/ME1_42 E1 connector (P1), pin assignment

P2 pin
A-20
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
---
Not connected
---
---
TTIP11
Brown
TRING11
Transmit, tributary 11, wire B Output
Brown/Gray ring
---
Not connected
---
---
---
Not connected
---
---
TTIP10
Red
TRING10
Red/Gray ring
TTIP9
Output
Orange
TRING9
Output
Orange/Gray ring
10
---
Not connected
---
---
11
---
Not connected
---
---
12
TRING8
Output
Yellow
13
TTIP8
Output
Yellow/Gray ring
14
TTIP7
Output
Green
15
TRING7
Output
Green/Gray ring
16
---
Not connected
---
---
17
---
Not connected
---
---
18
TTIP6
Output
Blue
19
TRING6
Output
Blue/Gray ring
20
TTIP5
Output
Violet
21
TRING5
Output
Violet/Gray ring
22
---
Not connected
---
---
23
---
Not connected
---
---
24
TTIP4
Output
White
25
TRING4
Output
White/Gray ring
26
TTIP3
Output
Pink
27
TRING3
Output
Pink/Gray ring
28
---
Not connected
---
---
29
---
Not connected
---
---
30
TTIP2
Output
Brown/White ring
31
TRING2
Output
Red/White ring
32
TTIP1
Output
Orange/White ring
33
TRING1
Output
Yellow/White ring
34
---
Not connected
---
---
35
---
Not connected
---
---
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
P2 pin
Connection Data
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
36
RTIP11
Input
Green/White ring
37
RRING11
Receive, tributary 11, wire B
Input
Blue/White ring
38
---
Not connected
---
---
39
---
Not connected
---
---
40
RTIP10
Input
Violet/White ring
41
RRING10
Input
Light Gray/White
ring
42
RTIP9
Input
Red/Brown ring
43
RRING9
Input
Yellow/Brown ring
44
---
Not connected
---
---
45
---
Not connected
---
---
46
RRING8
Input
Orange/Brown ring
47
RTIP8
Input
Green/Brown ring
48
RRING7
Input
Blue/Brown ring
49
RTIP7
Input
Violet/Brown ring
50
---
Not connected
---
---
51
---
Not connected
---
---
52
RTIP6
Input
Light Gray/Brown
ring
53
RRING6
Input
Pink/Brown ring
54
RTIP5
Input
Brown/Red ring
55
RRING5
Input
Light Gray/Red ring
56
---
Not connected
---
---
57
---
Not connected
---
---
58
RTIP4
Input
Yellow/Red ring
59
RRING4
Input
Green/Red ring
60
RTIP3
Input
Blue/Red ring
61
RRING3
Input
Violet/Red ring
62
---
Not connected
---
---
63
---
Not connected
---
---
64
RTIP2
Input
White/Red ring
65
RRING2
Input
Pink/Red ring
66
RTIP1
Input
Brown/Green ring
67
RRING1
Input
Light Gray/Green
ring
68
---
Not connected
---
---
Shelf
---
BRAID
---
---
426006-2332-013-A04
A-21
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Table A-12: ME1_21/ME1_42 E1 connector (P1), pin assignment

P1 pin Name
A-22
Function
Direction
Wire color
---
Not connected
---
---
RRING12
Input
Brown/Yellow ring
RTIP12
Input
Red/Yellow ring
RRING13
Input
Orange/Yellow ring
RTIP13
Input
Green/Yellow ring
---
Not connected
Input
---
---
Not connected
---
---
RRING14
---
Blue/Yellow ring
RTIP14
Input
Violet/Yellow ring
10
RTIP15
Input
Light Gray/Yellow
ring
11
RRING15
Input
White/Yellow ring
12
---
Not connected
---
---
13
---
Not connected
---
---
14
RRING16
Input
Brown/Blue ring
15
RTIP16
Input
Red/Blue ring
16
RRING17
Input
Orange/Blue ring
17
RTIP17
Input
Yellow/Blue ring
18
---
Not connected
---
---
19
---
Not connected
---
---
20
RRING18
Input
Green/Blue ring
21
RTIP18
Input
Violet/Blue ring
22
RRING19
Input
Light Gray/Blue ring
23
RTIP19
Input
White/Blue ring
24
---
Not connected
---
---
25
---
Not connected
---
---
26
RRING20
Input
Brown/Orange ring
27
RTIP20
Input
Red/Orange ring
28
RRING21
Input
Yellow/Orange ring
29
RTIP21
Input
Green/Orange ring
30
---
Not connected
---
---
31
---
Not connected
---
---
32
---
Not connected
---
---
33
---
Not connected
---
---
34
---
Not connected
---
---
35
---
Not connected
---
---
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
P1 pin Name
Function
Connection Data
Direction
Wire color
36
TRING12
Blue/Orange ring
37
TTIP12
Violet/Orange ring
38
TRING13
Light Gray/Orange
ring
39
TTIP13
White/Orange ring
40
---
Not connected
---
---
41
---
Not connected
---
---
42
TRING14
Brown/Violet ring
43
TTIP14
Red/Violet ring
44
TRING15
Orange/Violet ring
45
TTIP15
Yellow/Violet ring
46
---
Not connected
---
---
47
---
Not connected
---
---
48
TTIP16
Green/Violet ring
49
TRING16
Blue/Violet ring
50
TRING17
Light Gray/Violet
ring
51
TTIP17
White/Violet ring
52
---
Not connected
---
---
53
---
Not connected
---
---
54
TRING18
Brown/Pink ring
55
TTIP18
Red/Pink ring
56
TRING19
Orange/Pink ring
57
TTIP19
Yellow/Pink ring
58
---
Not connected
---
---
59
---
Not connected
---
---
60
TRING20
Green/Pink ring
61
TTIP20
Blue/Pink ring
62
TRING21
Light Gray/Pink ring
63
TTIP21
White/Pink ring
64
---
Not connected
---
---
65
---
Not connected
---
---
66
---
Not connected
---
---
67
---
Not connected
---
---
68
---
Not connected
---
---
Shelf
---
BRAID
---
---
426006-2332-013-A04
A-23
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Fast Ethernet Interface

Connectors
The BG-20B provides six 10/100BaseT interfaces directly from its front panel.
The connectors for the six Ethernet channels are six RJ-45 connectors, each
supporting a 10/100BaseT interface.
The MEoP_4/MEoPH provides four 10/100BaseT interfaces directly from its
front panel. The connectors for the four Ethernet channels are four RJ-45
connectors, each supporting a 10/100BaseT interface.
All 10 Mbps/100 Mbps Ethernet interfaces in the BG-20B base card and
MEoP_4/MEoPH support Auto MDIX. The figure "Ethernet connectors, pin
identification" in MNG Ethernet Connector (page A-3) identifies the RJ-45
connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector. The table Ethernet
connector, pin assignment in MNG Ethernet Connector (page A-3) lists the pin
assignment for a typical connector.
M345_3 Card Connection Data

The M345_3 card provides three unbalanced E3/DS-3 tributary interfaces. The
E3/DS-3 connectors are coaxial connectors (6 x DIN 1.0/2.3) in the M345_3
front panel.
MGE_1_L1 Card Connection Data

The MGE_1_L1 provides one Gigabit Ethernet port (one 1000Base-T RJ45 or
one 1000Base-X SFP); there is one RJ-45 connector and one SFP port
connector on the panel.
the connector.
Figure A-13: MGE_1_L1 connector, pin identification
The 1000Base-T interface connector pin assignment is as follows:
A-24
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Table A-13: Gigabit Ethernet connector (1000Base-T/RJ-45), pin assignment

Pin
Designation
Function
Direction
A-TX+
A-Transceiver, + wire
Bidirectional
A-TX-
A-Transceiver, - wire
B-TX+
B-Transceiver, + wire
b-TX-
B-Transceiver, - wire
C-TX+
C-Transceiver, + wire
C-TX-
C-Transceiver, - wire
D-TX+
D-Transceiver, + wire
D-TX-
D-Transceiver, - wire
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
P345_3E Card Connection Data

The P345_3E card provides three unbalanced E3/DS-3 tributary interfaces. The
E3/DS-3 connectors are coaxial connectors (6 x DIN 1.0/2.3) on the P345_3E
front panel.
PE1_63 Card Connection Data

The PE1_63 provides 63 balanced E1 tributary interfaces and has three twin
68-pin VHDCI female connectors. Each twin 68-pin VHDCI connector serves
the 21 E1 receive and transmit signals.
The PE1_63 uses the same cable as that for the ME1_21/ME1_42. The figure
"E1 connectors for ME1_21 and ME1_42, pin identification" identifies the E1
connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector. The Table
"ME1_21/ME1_42 E1 connector (P2), pin assignment" and the table
"ME1_21/ME1_42 E1 connector (P1), pin assignment" list the pin assignment
for this connector (E1 Connectors on ME1_21 and ME1_42 (page A-19)).
426006-2332-013-A04
A-25
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
ESW_2G_8F_E Card Connection

Data
In addition to two GbE interfaces based on SFP modules, the ESW_2G_8F_E
card provides eight 10/100BaseT interfaces directly from its front panel. The
connectors for the eight Ethernet channels are eight RJ-45 connectors, each
All 10 Mbps/100 Mbps Ethernet interfaces in the ESW_2G_8F_E support Auto
MDIX. The figure "Ethernet connectors, pin identification" identifies the RJ-45
connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector. The table "Ethernet
connectors, pin assignment" lists the pin assignment for a typical connector
(MNG Ethernet Connector (page A-3)).
MPS_2G_8F Card Connection

Data
In addition to two GbE interfaces based on SFP modules, the MPS_2G_8F card
provides eight 10/100BaseT interfaces directly from its front panel. The
connectors for the eight Ethernet channels are eight RJ-45 connectors, each
All 10 Mbps/100 Mbps Ethernet interfaces in the MPS_2G_8F support Auto
MDIX. The figure "Ethernet connectors, pin identification" identifies the RJ-45
connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector. The table "Ethernet
connectors, pin assignment" lists the pin assignment for a typical connector
(MNG Ethernet Connector (page A-3)).
SM_10E Card Connection Data

The SM_10E base card does not have any external interfaces. All external
interfaces are from the front panel of each type of SM_10E traffic module. The
following types of SM_10E traffic module are supported:
SM_FXO_8E
SM_FXS_8E
SM_EM_24W_6E
SM_V24E
SM_CODIR_4E
SM_OMNI_E
SM_EOP
SM_C37.94
A-26
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Most types of SM_10E traffic module use the same connector for the cabling
of their external traffic interfaces. This connector is a single SCSI-36 female
connector located on the front panel. The following figure identifies the
connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure A-14: SM_10E traffic module connector, pin identification
The following sections contain tables that describe the pin assignment of the
connector for each type of traffic module. These tables include the color of the
wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom
for connecting the SM_10E traffic module connector and a distribution frame.
The SM_EOP has two RJ-45 connectors for connecting to its interfaces and the
SM_C37.94 has two pairs of ST fiber optic connectors for connecting to its
interfaces.
Connection Data for SM_FXO_8E and

SM_FXS_8E Interfaces
The SM_FXO_8E and the SM_FXS_8E each support eight channels. Each
channel has one pair of wires. The following table lists the pin assignment for a
typical connector and lists the color of the wire connected to the corresponding
pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting the tributary connector
and a distribution frame.
Table A-14: SM_10E SM_FXO_8 and SM_FXS_8 connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
A1
Channel 1, wire A
Bidirectional
Brown
B1
Channel 1, wire B
Bidirectional
Brown/Black
A2
Channel 2, wire A
Bidirectional
Red
B2
Channel 2, wire B
Bidirectional
Red/Black
A3
Channel 3, wire A
Bidirectional
Orange
B3
Channel 3, wire B
Bidirectional
Orange/Black
A4
Channel 4, wire A
Bidirectional
Yellow
B4
Channel 4, wire B
Bidirectional
Yellow/Black
A5
Channel 5, wire A
Bidirectional
Green
10
B5
Channel 5, wire B
Bidirectional
Green/Black
11
A6
Channel 6, wire A
Bidirectional
Blue
426006-2332-013-A04
A-27
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
12
B6
Channel 6, wire B
Bidirectional
Blue/Black
13
A7
Channel 7, wire A
Bidirectional
Violet
14
B7
Channel 7, wire B
Bidirectional
Violet/Black
15
A8
Channel 8, wire A
Bidirectional
White
16
B8
Channel 8, wire B
Bidirectional
White/Black
NOTE: Only 8 of 18 pairs of wires are used for the

SM_FXO_8E or SM_FXS_8E interfaces.
Connection Data for SM_EM_24W6E

Interfaces
The SM_EM_24W6E supports six channels. Each has one pair of wires in 2W
mode, two pairs of wires in 4W or 2W E&M mode, and three pairs of wires in
4W E&M mode. The following table lists the pin assignment for a typical
connector and the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the
cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting the tributary connector and a
distribution frame.
Table A-15: SM_10E SM_EM_24W6E connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Mode
Function
Direction
Wire color
RA1
4W
Channel 1, Rx, wire A
Output
Brown
2W
Channel 1, wire A
Bidirectional
4W
Channel 1, Rx, wire B
Output
2W
Channel 1, wire B
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 2, wire A
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 2, wire B
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 3, wire A
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 3, wire B
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 4, wire A
Bidirectional
2
3
4
5
6
7
A-28
RB1
RA2
RB2
RA3
RB3
RA4
Brown/Black
Red
Red/Black
Orange
Orange/Black
Yellow
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Pin
Name
Mode
Function
Direction
Wire color
RB4
4W
Output
Yellow/Black
2W
Channel 4, wire B
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 5, wire A
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 5, wire B
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 6, wire A
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 6, wire B
Bidirectional
9
10
11
12
RA5
RB5
RA6
RB6
Green
Green/Black
Blue
Blue/Black
13
E1
Any
Channel 1, E
Output
Violet
14
M1
Any
Channel 1, M
Input
Violet/Black
15
E2
Any
Channel 2, E
Output
White
16
M2
Any
Channel 2, M
Input
White/Black
17
E3
Any
Channel 3, E
Output
Pink
18
M3
Any
Channel 3, M
Input
Pink/Black
19
TA1
4W
Channel 1, Tx, wire A
Input
Brown/White
2W
---
---
4W
Channel 1, Tx, wire B
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
TB1
TA2
TB2
TA3
TB3
TA4
TB4
426006-2332-013-A04
Red/White
Orange/White
Yellow/White
Green/White
Blue/White
Violet/White
Light
Gray/White
A-29
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Mode
Function
Direction
Wire color
27
TA5
4W
Input
Red/Brown
2W
---
---
28
TB5
4W
Yellow/Brown
29
TA6
4W
Orange/Brown
30
TB6
4W
Green/Brown
31
E4
Any
Channel 4, E
Output
Blue/Brown
32
M4
Any
Channel 4, M
Input
Violet/Brown
33
E5
Any
Channel 5, E
Output
Light
Gray/Brown
34
M5
Any
Channel 5, M
Input
Pink/Brown
35
E6
Any
Channel 6, E
Output
Brown/Red
36
M6
Any
Channel 6, M
Input
Light Gray/Red
NOTE: The number of wires used depends on the mode of

each channel. All 18 pairs of wires are used for the
SM_EM_24W6E module if all channels are in four-wire
E&M mode.
Connection Data for SM_V35E Interfaces

The SM_V35E/SM_V35U_E supports two channels of V.35 interface. Each
channel has 16 wires. The following table lists the pin assignment for a typical
connector and the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the
cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting the tributary connector and a
distribution frame.
Table A-16: SM_10E SM_V35E connector, pin assignment
A-30
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CH1# RD- (104b)
Ch1# receive data -
Output
Brown
CH1# RD+ (104a)
Ch1# receive data +
Output
Brown/Black
CH1# RC- (115b)
Ch1# receive timing -
Output
Red
CH1# RC+ (115a)
Ch1# receive timing +
Output
Red/Black
CH1# TMC- (113b)
Ch1# terminal timing -
Input
Orange
CH1# TMC+ (113a)
Ch1# terminal timing +
Input
Orange/Black
CH2# RD- (104b)
Ch2# receive data -
Output
Yellow
CH2# RD+ (104a)
Ch2# receive data +
Output
Yellow/Black
CH2# RC- (115b)
Ch2# receive timing -
Output
Green
10
CH2# RC+ (115a)
Ch2# receive timing +
Output
Green/black
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
11
CH2# TMC- (113b)
Ch2# terminal timing -
Input
Blue
12
CH2# TMC+ (113a)
Ch2# terminal timing +
Input
Blue/Black
13
CH2# CTS (106)
Ch2# clear to send
Output
Violet
14
CH2# DSR (107)
Ch2# data set ready
Output
Violet/Black
15
CH1# DCD(109)
Ch1# data carrier detect
Output
White
16
CH2# DCD(109)
Ch2# data carrier detect
Output
White/Black
17
GND
Signal ground
---
Pink
18
GND
Signal ground
---
Pink/Black
19
CH1# TD- (103b)
Ch1# transmit data -
Input
Brown/White
20
CH1# TD+ (103a)
Ch1# transmit data +
Input
Red/White
21
CH1# TC- (114b)
Ch1# transmit timing -
Output
Orange/White
22
CH1# TC+ (114a)
Ch1# transmit timing +
Output
Yellow/White
23
CH1# CTS (106)
Ch1# clear to send
Output
Green/White
24
CH1# DSR (107)
Ch1# data set ready
Output
Blue/White
25
CH2# TD- (103b)
Ch2# transmit data -
Input
Violet/White
26
CH2# TD+ (103a)
Ch2# transmit data +
Input
Light
Gray/White
27
CH2# TC- (114b)
Ch2# transmit timing -
Output
Red/Brown
28
CH2# TC+ (114a)
Ch2# transmit timing +
Output
Yellow/Brown
29
CH1# RTS (105)
Ch1# request to send
Input
Orange/Brown
30
---
---
---
---
31
CH2# RTS (105)
Ch2# request to send
Input
Blue/Brown
32
---
---
---
---
33
CH1# DTR (108)
Ch1# data terminal ready Input
Light
Gray/Brown
34
---
Not connected
---
35
CH2# DTR (108)
Ch2# data terminal ready Input
Brown/Red
36
---
Not connected
---
426006-2332-013-A04
-----
A-31
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual

The SM_V24E module supports the following three modes:
8 x V.24 transparent without control signals
4 x V.24 asynchronous mode with control signals
2 x V.24 synchronous mode with control signals
In 8 x V.24 transparent mode, the SM_V24E supports eight channels, each

with three wires. The following table lists the pin assignment for a typical
connector when the SM_V24E is in 8 x V.24 transparent mode. This table also
lists the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables
offered by ECI Telecom for connecting the tributary connector and a
distribution frame.
Table A-17: SM_10E SM_V24E connector, pin assignment for 8 x V.24 transparent
without controls mode
A-32
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
13
CH7# SD(103)
Ch7# transmit data
Input
Violet
14
CH7# RD(104)
Ch7# receive data
Output
Violet/Black
15
CH8# SD(103)
Ch8# transmit data
Input
White
16
CH8# RD(104)
Ch8# receive data
Output
White/Black
17
GND
Signal ground
---
Pink
18
GND
Signal ground
---
Pink/Black
19
CH1# SD(103)
Ch1# transmit data
Input
Brown/White
20
CH1# RD(104)
Ch1# receive data
Output
Red/White
21
CH2# SD(103)
Ch2# transmit data
Input
Orange/White
22
CH2# RD(104)
Ch2# receive data
Output
Yellow/White
23
CH3# SD(103)
Ch3# transmit data
Input
Green/White
24
CH3# RD(104)
Ch3# receive data
Output
Blue/White
25
CH4# SD(103)
Ch4# transmit data
Input
Violet/White
26
CH4# RD(104)
Ch4# receive data
Output
Light Gray/White
27
CH5# SD(103)
Ch5# transmit data
Input
Red/Brown
28
CH5# RD(104)
Ch5# receive data
Output
Yellow/Brown
29
CH6# SD(103)
Ch6# transmit data
Input
Orange/Brown
30
CH6# RD(104)
Ch6# receive data
Output
Green/Brown
31
GND
Signal ground
---
Blue/Brown
32
GND
Signal ground
---
Violet/Brown
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
33
GND
Signal ground
---
Light Gray/Brown
34
GND
Signal ground
---
Pink/Brown
35
GND
Signal ground
---
Brown/Red
36
GND
Signal ground
---
Light Gray/Red
In mode 4 x V.24 asynchronous with controls, the SM_V24E supports four

channels, each with eight wires. The following table lists the pin assignment for
a typical connector when the SM_V24E is in 4 x V.24 asynchronous with
controls mode. This table also lists the color of the wire connected to the
corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting the
tributary connector and a distribution frame.
Table A-18: SM_V24E connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CH1# RTS(105)
Ch1# require to send
Input
Brown
CH1# CTS(106)
Ch1# clear to send
Output
Brown/Black
CH1# DTR(108) Ch1# data terminal

ready
Input
Red
CH1# DSR(107) Ch1# data set ready
Output
Red/Black
CH1# DCD(109) Ch1# data carrier detect Output
Orange
Orange/Black
CH2# RTS(105)
Input
Yellow
CH2# CTS(106)
Ch2# clear to send
Output
Yellow/Black

ready
Input
Green
10
Output
Green/Black
11
Blue
12
Blue/Black
13
CH4# RTS(105)
Input
Violet
14
CH4# CTS(106)
Ch4# clear to send
Output
Violet/Black
15

ready
Input
White
16
Output
White/Black
17
---
Not connected
---
---
18
---
Not connected
---
---
19
CH1# SD(103)
Ch1# transmit data
Input
Brown/White
20
CH1# RD(104)
Ch1# receive data
Output
Red/White
426006-2332-013-A04
A-33
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
21
CH2# SD(103)
Ch2# transmit data
Input
Orange/White
22
CH2# RD(104)
Ch2# receive data
Output
Yellow/White
23
CH3# SD(103)
Ch3# transmit data
Input
Green/White
24
CH3# RD(104)
Ch3# receive data
Output
Blue/White
25
CH4# SD(103)
Ch4# transmit data
Input
Violet/White
26
CH4# RD(104)
Ch4# receive data
Output
Light Gray/White
27
CH3# RTS(105)
Input
Red/Brown
28
CH3# CTS(106)
Ch3# clear to send
Output
Yellow/Brown
29
CH3# DTR(108) Ch3# data terminal read Input
Orange/Brown
30
Output
Green/Brown
31
---
Not connected
---
---
32
---
Not connected
---
---
33
SG1
Signal ground
---
Light Gray/Brown
34
SG2
Signal ground
---
Pink/Brown
35
SG3
Signal ground
---
Brown/Red
36
SG4
Signal ground
---
Light Gray/Red
In mode 2 x V.24 synchronous with controls, the SM_V24E supports two

channels, each with eleven wires. The following table lists the pin assignment
for a typical connector when the SM_V24E is in 2 x V.24 synchronous with
controls mode. This table also lists the color of the wire connected to the
Table A-19: SM_10E SM_V24E connector, pin assignment for 2 x V.24
synchronous with controls mode
A-34
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CH1# RTS(105)
Input
Brown
CH1# CTS(106)
Ch1# clear to send
Output
Brown/Black
CH1# DTR(108)
Ch1# data terminal

ready
Input
Red
CH1# DSR(107)
Ch1# data set ready
Output
Red/Black
CH1# DCD(109)
Ch1# data carrier

detect
Output
Orange
CH1# RC(115)
Ch1# receive timing
Output
Orange/Black
CH2# RTS(105)
Input
Yellow
CH2# CTS(106)
Ch2# clear to send
Output
Yellow/Black
CH2# DTR(108)
Ch2# data terminal

ready
Input
Green
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
10
CH2# DSR(107)
Ch2# data set ready
Output
Green/Black
11
CH2# DCD(109)
Ch2# data carrier

detect
Output
Blue
12
CH2# RC(115)
Ch2# receive timing
Output
Blue/Black
13-18 ---
Not connected
---
---
19
CH1# SD(103)
CH1# transmit data
20
CH1# RD(104)
CH1# receive data
Output
Red/White
21
CH2# SD(103)
CH2# transmit data
Input
Orange/White
22
CH2# RD(104)
CH2# receive data
Output
Yellow/White
23
CH1# TMC(113)
Ch1# DTE timing
Input
Green/White
24
CH1# TC(114)
Ch1# transmit timing
Output
Blue/White
25
CH2# TMC(113)
Ch2# DTE timing
Input
Violet/White
26
CH2# TC(114)
Ch2# transmit timing
Output
Light Gray/White
27-34 ---
Not connected
---
---
35
SG1
Signal ground
---
Brown/Red
36
SG2
Signal ground
---
Light Gray/Red
Brown/White
Connection Data for SM_V35_V11 Interfaces

The SM_V35_V11 supports two channels of V.35 or V.11 interface. Each
interface can independently be configured as V.35 or V.11/X.24 and can be
mapped to unframed E1 or N x 64K of framed E1 (the interface rate N is
configurable). The following table lists the pin assignment of V.11 interfaces
for a typical connector and the color of the wire connected to the corresponding
Table A-20: SM_10E SM_V35_V11 connector, pin assignment
Pin
V.11 signal
Function
Direction
Wire color
20
T(a)
Ch1# transmit data+
Input
Red/White
19
T(b)
Ch1# transmit data-
Input
Brown/White
R(a)
Ch1# receive data+
Output
Brown/Black
R(b)
Ch1# receive data-
Output
Brown
22
S(a)
Ch1# transmit timing+
Output
Yellow/White
21
S(b)
Ch1# transmit timing-
Output
Orange/White
29
C(a)
Ch1# request to send+
Input
Orange/Brown
30
C(b)
Ch1# request to send-
Input
Green/Brown
23
I(a)
Ch1# clear to send+
Output
Green/White
426006-2332-013-A04
A-35
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Pin
V.11 signal
Function
Direction
Wire color
32
I(b)
Ch1# clear to send-
Output
Violate/Brown
17
GND
Ground
---
Pink
26
T(a)
Ch2# transmit data+
Input
Light Gray/White
25
T(b)
Ch2# transmit data-
Input
Violet/White
R(a)
Ch2# receive data+
Output
Yellow/Black
R(b)
Ch2# receive data-
Output
Yellow
28
S(a)
Ch2# transmit timing+
Output
Yellow/Brown
27
S(b)
Ch2# transmit timing-
Output
Red/Brown
31
C(a)
Ch2# request to send+
Output
Blue/Brown
34
C(b)
Ch2# request to send-
Input
Pink/Brown
13
I(a)
Ch2# clear to send+
Output
Violet
36
I(b)
Ch2# clear to send-
Output
Light Gray/Red
18
GND
Ground
---
Pink/Black
Connection Data for SM_CODIR_4E

Interfaces
The SM_CODIR_4E supports four channels of codirectional 64 Kbps interface,
each with two pairs of wires. The following table lists the pin assignment for a
typical connector and the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin
in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting the tributary connector
Table A-21: SM_10E SM_CODIR_4E connector, pin assignment
A-36
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
RA1
Input
Brown
RB1
Input
Brown/Black
RA2
Input
Red
RB2
Input
Red/Black
RA3
Input
Orange
RB3
Input
Orange/Black
RA4
Input
Yellow
RB4
Input
Yellow/Black
9-18
---
Not connected
---
---
19
TA1
Output
Brown/White
20
TB1
Output
Red/White
21
TA2
Output
Orange/White
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
22
TB2
Output
Yellow/White
23
TA3
Output
Green/White
24
TB3
Output
Blue/White
25
TA4
Output
Violet/White
26
TB4
Output
Light Gray/White
Not connected
---
---
27-36 ---
NOTE: Only 8 of 18 pairs of wires are used for

SM_CODIR_4E interfaces.
Connection Data for SM_OMNI_E Interfaces

The SM_OMNI_E supports four 2W/4W channels. Each channel has one pair
of wires in 2W mode, two pairs of wires in 4W mode. The following table lists
the pin assignment for a typical connector. This table also lists the color of the
wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom
for connecting between the tributary connector and a distribution frame.
Table A-22: SM_10E SM_OMNI_E connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Mode
Function
Direction
Wire color
RA1
4W
Output
Brown
2W
Channel 1, wire A
Bidirectional
4w
Output
2w
Channel 1, wire B
Bidirectional
4w
Output
2w
Channel 2, wire A
Bidirectional
4w
Output
2W
Channel 2, wire B
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 3, wire A
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 3, wire B
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 4, wire A
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 4, wire B
Bidirectional
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RB1
RA2
RB2
RA3
RB3
RA4
RB4
426006-2332-013-A04
Brown/Black
Red
Red/Black
Orange
Orange/Black
Yellow
Yellow/Black
A-37
Connection Data
Pin

Maintenance Manual
Mode
Function
Direction
Wire color
9-18 ---
---
Not connected
---
---
19
4W
Input
Brown/White
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
Not connected
---
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Name
TA1
TB1
TA2
TB2
TA3
TB3
TA4
TB4
27-3 --6
Red/White
Orange/White
Yellow/White
Green/White
Blue/White
Violet/White
Light Gray/White
---
NOTE: Only eight of 18 pairs of wires are used for

SM_OMNI_E interfaces.
A-38
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
ICP_VF Connection Data

A single ICP_VF can serve one of the following SM_10E modules:
SM_FXS_8E
SM_FXO_8E
SM_EM_24W6E (Connectors marked with CH7 and CH8 are not

connected.)
SM_Codir_4_E (Connectors marked with CH5 to CH8 are not connected.)
There are eight RJ-45 connectors for external interfaces on the front panel of
the ICP_VF. The figure "Ethernet connectors, pin identification" identifies the
RJ-45 connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector (MNG Ethernet
Connector (page A-3)). The following tables list the pin assignment for a
typical connector, when serving each type of traffic module. These tables also
list the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables
offered by ECI Telecom for connecting between the tributary connector and a
distribution frame.
Table A-23: ICP_VF RJ-45 connector, pin assignment for serving SM_FXS_8E or
SM_FXO_8E
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
Line A
Wire A
Bidirectional
Blue/White ring
Line B
Wire B
Bidirectional
White/Blue ring
4-8
---
Not connected
---
---
Table A-24: ICP_VF RJ-45 connector, pin assignment for serving SM_EM_24W6E
Pin
1
2
3
4
Name
Mode
Function
Direction
Wire color
RA1
4W
Output
Blue/White ring
2W
Channel 1, wire A
Bidirectional
4W
Output
2W
Channel 1, wire B
Bidirectional
4W
Input
2W
---
---
4W
Input
2W
---
---
RB1
TA1
TB1
White/blue ring
Green/White ring
White/Green ring
---
---
---
---
Brown/White ring
---
---
---
---
White/Brown ring
E1
Any
Channel 1, E
Output
Orange/White ring
M1
Any
Channel 1, M
Input
White/Orange ring
426006-2332-013-A04
A-39
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Table A-25: ICP_VF RJ-45 connector, pin assignment for serving SM_CODIR_4E
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
RA
Rx, wire A
Input
Blue/White ring
RB
Rx, wire B
Input
White/Blue ring
TA
Tx, wire A
Output
Green/White ring
TB
Tx, wire B
Output
White/Green ring
ICP_V24 Connection Data

V.24 interfaces in the SM_V24E are always in DCE mode. One ICP_V24 can
serve one SM_V24E module. The SM_V24E module can work in the
following three modes:
Eight channels of transparent without controls mode (Connectors marked

SYNC CH1 and SYNC CH2 are not connected.)
Four channels of asynchronous with controls mode (Connectors marked

SYNC CH1 and SYNC CH2 and CH5 to CH8 are not connected.)
Two channels of synchronous with controls mode (Connectors marked

CH1 to CH8 are not connected.)
Two types of connectors for external interfaces are on the front panel of the
ICP_V24:
25-pin D-type male connector for synchronous V.24 interfaces
9-pin D-type male connector for transparent or asynchronous V.24

interfaces
The following figure identifies the 25-pin D-type male connector pins as seen
when looking into the connector. The table lists the connector pin assignment
Figure A-15: 25-pin D-type male connector, pin identification
A-40
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Table A-26: ICP_V24 synchronous V.24 25-pin D-type connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
---
Not connected
---
---
SD (103)
Transmit data
Input
Brown
RD (104)
Receive data
Output
Brown/Gray ring
RTS (105)
Request to send
Input
Red
CTS (106)
Clear to send
Output
Red/Gray ring
DSR (107)
Data set ready
Output
Orange
GND
Signal ground
---
Orange/Gray ring
DCD (109)
Data carrier detect
Output
Yellow
---
Not connected
---
---
10
---
Not connected
---
---
11
---
Not connected
---
---
12
---
Not connected
---
---
13
---
Not connected
---
---
14
---
Not connected
---
---
15
TC (114)
Transmit timing
---
---
16
---
Not connected
---
---
17
RC (115)
Receive timing
---
---
18
---
Not connected
---
---
19
---
Not connected
---
---
20
DTR(108)
Data terminal ready Input
Green/Gray ring
21
---
Not connected
---
---
22
---
Not connected
---
---
23
---
Not connected
---
---
24
TMC (113)
DTE timing
Input
Blue
25
---
Not connected
---
---
when looking into the connector. The tables list the pin assignment for a typical
connector in modes asynchronous with controls and transparent without
controls. These tables also list the color of the wire connected to the
426006-2332-013-A04
A-41
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Table A-27: ICP_V24 asynchronous V.24 9-pin D-type connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
DCD (109)
Data carrier detect
Output
Blue/White ring
SD (103)
Transmit data
Input
White/Blue ring
RD (104)
Receive data
Output
Orange/White ring
DTR (108)
Data terminal ready
Input
White/Orange ring
GND
Signal ground
---
White/Green ring
DSR (107)
Data set ready
Output
Green/White ring
CTS (106)
Clear to send
Output
Brown/White ring
RTS (105)
Request to send
Input
White/Brown ring
---
Not connected
---
---
Table A-28: ICP_V24 transparent V.24 9-pin D-type connector, pin assignment
A-42
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
---
Not connected
---
---
SD (103)
Transmit data
Input
Brown
RD (104)
Receive data
Output
Brown/Black
---
Not connected
---
---
GND
Receive data
---
Red
---
Not connected
---
---
---
Not connected
---
---
---
Not connected
---
---
---
Not connected
---
---
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
ICP_V35 Connection Data

V.35 interfaces in the SM_V35E are always in DCE mode. One ICP_V35 can
serve a single SM_V35E module. Two M34 female connectors for external
interfaces are on the front panel of the ICP_V35.
The following figure identifies the M34 female connector pins as seen when
looking into the connector. The table lists the connector pin assignment for a
typical connector and the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin
in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting the tributary connector
Figure A-17: M34 female connector, pin identification

Table A-29: ICP_V35 M34 female connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Direction
Wire color
CGND (101) Case ground
---
Brown
GND (102)
Signal ground
---
Brown/Gray ring
RTS (105)
Request to send
Input
Red
CTS (106)
Clear to send
Output
Red/Gray ring
DSR (107)
Data set ready
Output
Orange
DCD (109)
Data carrier detect
Output
Orange/Gray ring
DTR (108)
Data terminal ready
Input
Yellow
TD+ (103a)
Transmit data +
Input
Green
TD- (103b)
Transmit data -
Input
Green/Gray ring
RD+ (104a)
Receive data +
Output
Blue
RD- (104b)
Receive data -
Output
Blue/Gray ring
TMC+ (113a) Terminal clock +
Input
Violet
TMC- (113b) Terminal clock -
Input
Violet/Gray ring
RC+ (115a)
Receive clock +
Output
White
RC- (115b)
Receive clock -
Output
White/Gray ring
TC+ (114a)
Transmit clock +
Output
Pink
AA
TC- (114b)
Transmit clock -
Output
Pink/Gray ring
426006-2332-013-A04
Function
A-43
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
ICP_V11_V24 Connection Data

One ICP_V11_V24 can serve one SM_V35_V11 module. Two DB15 female
connectors and two DB25 male connectors make up two channels for external
interfaces on the front panel of the ICP_V11_V24. Each channel has one DB15
female connector and one DB25 male connector.
The following figure identifies the 15-pin D-type female connector pins as seen
pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom.
Figure A-18: 15-pin D-type female connector, pin identification

Table A-30: ICP_V11_V24 15-pin D-type connector, pin assignment
A-44
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CGND
Case ground
---
---
T+
Transmit data+
Input
Brown
C+
Request to send+
Input
Orange
R+
Receive data+
Output
White
I+
Clear to send+
Output
Yellow
S+
Transmit timing+
Output
Red
---
Not connected
---
---
Ground
Signal GND
---
Green
T-
Transmit data-
Input
Brown/Gray Loop
10
C-
Request to send-
Input
Orange/Gray Loop
11
R-
Receive data-
Output
White/Gray Loop
12
I-
Clear to send-
Output
Yellow/Gray Loop
13
S-
Transmit timing-
Output
Red/Gray Loop
14
---
Not connected
---
---
15
---
Not connected
---
---
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data

Table A-31: ICP_V11_V24 V.24 25-pin D-type connector, pin assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
---
Not connected
---
---
SD (103)
Transmit data
Input
Brown
RD (104)
Receive data
Output
Brown/Gray ring
RTS (105)
Request to send
Input
Red
CTS (106)
Clear to send
Output
Red/Gray ring
DSR (107)
Data set ready
Output
Orange
GND
Signal ground
---
Orange/Gray ring
DCD (109)
Data carrier detect
Output
Yellow
---
Not connected
---
---
10
---
Not connected
---
---
11
---
Not connected
---
---
12
---
Not connected
---
---
13
---
Not connected
---
---
14
---
Not connected
---
---
15
TC (114)
Transmit timing
---
---
16
---
Not connected
---
---
17
RC (115)
Receive timing
---
---
18
---
Not connected
---
---
19
---
Not connected
---
---
20
DTR (108)
Data terminal ready Input
Green/Gray ring
21
---
Not connected
---
---
22
---
Not connected
---
---
23
---
Not connected
---
---
24
TMC (113)
DTE timing
Input
Blue
25
---
Not connected
---
---
426006-2332-013-A04
A-45
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
ICP_DB37D Connection Data

One ICP_DB37D can serve one SM_V35_V11 module. Two DB37 female
connectors for external interfaces are on the front panel of the ICP_DB37D.
Connector pin-out is defined for the following six types of interfaces:
RS449
RS422
V.36
V.35
V.11/X.24
Synchronous V.24
The following figure identifies the 37-pin D-type female connector pins as seen
Figure A-20: 37-pin D-type female connector, pin identification

Table A-32: ICP_DB37D 37 pin D-type connector, pin assignment
A-46
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CGND
Case ground
---
Black
---
Not connected
---
---
---
Not connected
---
---
TD+ (103a)
Transmit data+
Output
Black/White
TC+ (114a)
Transmit timing+
Output
Brown
RD+ (104a)
Receive data+
Input
Brown/White
RTS_O+ (105a)
Request to send+
Input
Red
RC+ (115a)
Receive timing+
Input
Red/White
CTS_O+
Clear to send+
Output
Orange
10
---
Not connected
---
---
11
DSR (107)
Data set ready
Output
Orange/White
12
DTR (108)
Data terminal ready
Input
Yellow
13
DCD (109)
Data carrier detect
Output
Yellow/Black
14
---
Not connected
---
---
15
---
Not connected
---
---
16
---
Not connected
---
---
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
17
TMC+ (113a)
Terminal timing+
---
Green
18
---
Not connected
---
---
19
GND (102)
Signal ground
---
Green/White
20
---
Not connected
---
---
21
---
Not connected
---
---
22
TD- (103b)
Transmit data-
Output
Blue
23
TC- (114b)
Transmit timing-
Output
Blue/White
24
RD- (104b)
Receive data-
---
Purple
25
RTS_O- (105b)
Request to send-
Input
Purple/White
26
RC- (115b)
Receive timing-
Input
Gray
27
CTS- (106b)
Clear to send-
Output
Gray/Black
28
---
Not connected
---
---
29
---
Not connected
---
---
30
---
Not connected
---
---
31
---
Not connected
---
---
32
---
Not connected
---
---
33
---
Not connected
---
---
34
---
Not connected
---
---
35
TMC- (113b)
Terminal timing-
Output
White
36
---
Not connected
---
---
37
---
Not connected
---
---
Table A-33: ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, RS-449 pin assignment
TD+ (103a)
Transmit data+
Output
Black/White
RD+ (104a)
Receive data+
Input
Brown/White
19
GND (102)
Signal ground
---
Green/White
22
TD- (103b)
Transmit data-
Output
Blue
24
RD- (104b)
Receive data-
---
Purple
Table A-34: ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, RS-422 pin assignment
TD+ (103a)
Transmit data+
Output
Black/White
RD+ (104a)
Receive data+
Input
Brown/White
19
GND (102)
Signal ground
---
Green/White
22
TD- (103b)
Transmit data-
Output
Blue
24
RD- (104b)
Receive data-
---
Purple
426006-2332-013-A04
A-47
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Table A-35: ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, V.36 pin assignment

Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CGND
Case ground
---
Black
TD+ (103a)
Transmit data+
Output
Black/White
TC+ (114a)
Transmit timing+
Output
Brown
RD+ (104a)
Receive data+
Input
Brown/White
RTS_O+ (105a)
Request to send+
Input
Red
RC+ (115a)
Receive timing+
Input
Red/White
CTS_O+
Clear to send+
Output
Orange
11
DSR (107)
Data set ready
Output
Orange/White
12
DTR (108)
Data terminal ready
Input
Yellow
13
DCD (109)
Data carrier detect
Output
Yellow/Black
17
TMC+ (113a)
Terminal timing+
---
Green
19
GND (102)
Signal ground
---
Green/White
22
TD- (103b)
Transmit data-
Output
Blue
23
TC- (114b)
Transmit timing-
Output
Blue/White
24
RD- (104b)
Receive data-
---
Purple
26
RC- (115b)
Receive timing-
Input
Gray
35
TMC- (113b)
Terminal timing-
Output
White
Table A-36: ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, V.35 pin assignment
A-48
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CGND
Case ground
---
Black
TD+ (103a)
Transmit data+
Output
Black/White
TC+ (114a)
Transmit timing+
Output
Brown
RD+ (104a)
Receive data+
Input
Brown/White
RTS_O+ (105a)
Request to send+
Input
Red
RC+ (115a)
Receive timing+
Input
Red/White
CTS_O+
Clear to send+
Output
Orange
11
DSR (107)
Data set ready
Output
Orange/White
12
DTR (108)
Data terminal ready
Input
Yellow
13
DCD (109)
Data carrier detect
Output
Yellow/Black
17
TMC+ (113a)
Terminal timing+
---
Green
19
GND (102)
Signal ground
---
Green/White
22
TD- (103b)
Transmit data-
Output
Blue
23
TC- (114b)
Transmit timing-
Output
Blue/White
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
24
RD- (104b)
Receive data-
---
Purple
26
RC- (115b)
Receive timing-
Input
Gray
35
TMC- (113b)
Terminal timing-
Output
White
Table A-37: ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, V.11/X.24 pin assignment

Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
CGND
Case ground
---
Black
TD+ (103a)
Transmit data+
Output
Black/White
TC+ (114a)
Transmit timing+
Output
Brown
RD+ (104a)
Receive data+
Input
Brown/White
RTS_O+ (105a)
Request to send+
Input
Red
CTS_O+
Clear to send+
Output
Orange
19
GND (102)
Signal ground
---
Green/White
22
TD- (103b)
Transmit data-
Output
Blue
23
TC- (114b)
Transmit timing-
Output
Blue/White
24
RD- (104b)
Receive data-
---
Purple
25
RTS_O- (105b)
Request to send-
Input
Purple/White
27
CTS- (106b)
Clear to send-
Output
Gray/Black
Table A-38: ICP_DB37D 37-pin D-type connector, synchronous V.24 pin

assignment
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
Wire color
TD+ (103a)
Transmit data+
Output
Black/White
TC+ (114a)
Transmit timing+
Output
Brown
RD+ (104a)
Receive data+
Input
Brown/White
RTS_O+ (105a)
Request to send+
Input
Red
RC+ (115a)
Receive timing+
Input
Red/White
CTS_O+
Clear to send+
Output
Orange
11
DSR (107)
Data set ready
Output
Orange/White
12
DTR (108)
Data terminal ready
Input
Yellow
13
DCD (109)
Data carrier detect
Output
Yellow/Black
17
TMC+ (113a)
Terminal timing+
---
Green
19
GND (102)
Signal ground
---
Green/White
426006-2332-013-A04
A-49
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
RAP-4B Connectors
SHELF ALARM Connectors
The four ALARM connectors are 36-pin SCSI female connectors that can each
be connected to the ALARMS connector of an XDM, BG, or 9600 series
platform. The following figure identifies the connector pins (as seen when
looking into the connector).
Figure A-21: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector, pin identification

Table A-39: RAP-4B PLATFORM ALARM connector, pin assignment
A-50
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
N/C
--
--
ALM_IP1
Alarm input 1, + wire
Input
ALM_IN1
Alarm input 1, - wire
Input
ALM_IP2
Input
ALM_IN2
Input
ALM_IP3
Input
ALM_IN3
Input
ALM_IP4
Input
ALM_IN4
Input
10
N/C
--
--
11
N/C
--
--
12
GND
Ground
--
13
ALM_O1
Alarm output 1 common
Output
14
N/C
--
--
15
GND
Ground
--
16
ALM_O2
Alarm output 2 common
Output
17
N/C
--
--
18
BUZ_COM
Buzzer common
Input
19
N/C
--
--
20
GND
Ground
--
21
CRIT_COM
Critical alarm common
--
22
N/C
--
--
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
23
MAJ_COM
Major alarm common
Input
24
GND
Ground
--
25
N/C
--
--
26
GND
Ground
--
27
MIN_COM
Minor alarm common
Input
28
N/C
--
--
29
WARN_COM
Warning alarm common
--
30
GND
Ground
--
31
N/C
--
--
32
N/C
--
--
33
N/C
--
--
34
N/C
--
--
35
GND
Ground
--
36
N/C
--
--
ALARM IN/OUT Connector

The ALARM IN/OUT connector is a 68-pin SCSI female connector that carries
three groups of lines to the customer equipment:
Sixteen external alarm inputs connected to the ALARM inputs of the

BroadGate platforms. Four inputs are allocated to each one. Each input is
activated by closing a dry contact provided from the customer's facility.
Eight sets of changeover relay contacts, floating with respect to platform

ground, that serve as rack (bay) status outputs. Each couple of the eight
relays is assigned to the two output alarm lines of each BroadGate platform
connected to the RAP-4B.
Four sets of changeover relay contacts, floating with respect to platform

ground, that serve as rack (bay) alarm indication lines. The relays,
identified as critical, major, minor, and warning, are activated by the
corresponding alarm relays of BroadGate platforms.
Relay contact ratings are 72 V in open state and 1A in closed state.

The following figure identifies the ALARM IN/OUT connector pins, as seen
when looking into the connector.
Figure A-22: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector, pin identification
426006-2332-013-A04
A-51
Connection Data

Maintenance Manual
Table A-40: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector, pin assignment

Assignment
Pin
Designation
Function
Platform 1
ALM_01NO
Output relay 1, normally open Output

contact
Black
ALM_01COM
Output relay 1, common

contact
Output
Brown
ALM_01NC
Output relay 1, normally

closed contact
Output
Red
ALM_02NO

contact
Orange
ALM_02COM

contact
Output
Yellow
ALM_02NC

closed contact
Output
Green
ALM_03NO

contact
Blue
ALM_03COM

contact
Output
Violet
ALM_03NC

closed contact
Output
Gray
10
ALM_04NO

contact
White
11
ALM_04COM

contact
Output
Pink
12
ALM_04NC

closed contact
Output
Light Green
13
ALM_05NO

contact
Black/White
14
ALM_05COM

contact
Output
Brown/White
15
ALM_05NC

closed contact
Output
Red/White
16
ALM_06NO

contact
Orange/White
17
ALM_06COM

contact
Output
Green/White
18
ALM_06NC

closed contact
Output
Blue/White
19
ALM_07NO

contact
Violet/White
20
ALM_07COM

contact
Output
Red/Black
21
ALM_07NC

closed contact
Output
Orange/Black
22
ALM_08NO

contact
Yellow/Black
23
ALM_08COM

contact
Output
Green/Black
24
ALM_08NC

closed contact
Output
Gray/Black
Platform 2
Platform 3
Platform 4
A-52
Direction
Wire color
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Connection Data
Assignment
Pin
Designation
Function
Direction
Wire color
All platforms
25
CRIT_NC
Critical alarm relay, normally

closed contact
Output
Pink/Black
26
CRIT_NO
Critical alarm relay, normally

open contact
Output
Pink/Green
27
CRIT_COM
Critical alarm relay, common

contact
Output
Pink/Red
28
MAJ_NC
Major alarm relay, normally

closed contact
Output
Pink/Violet
29
MAJ_NO
Major alarm relay, normally

open contact
Output
Light Blue
30
MAJ_COM
Major alarm relay, common

contact
Output
Light Blue/Brown
31
MIN_NC
Minor alarm relay, normally

closed contact
Output
Light Blue/Red
32
MIN_NO
Minor alarm relay, normally

open contact
Output
Light Blue/Violet
33
MIN_COM
Minor alarm relay, common

contact
Output
Light Blue/Black
34
WARN_COM
Warning alarm relay,

common contact
Output
Gray/Green
35
ALMIN1
External alarm input 1
Input
Gray/Red
36
ALM_IN1
Input
Gray/Violet
37
ALMIN2
Input
Light Green/Black
38
ALM_IN2
Input
Violet/Black
39
ALMIN3
Input
Black/White dots
40
ALM_IN3
Input
Brown/White dots
41
ALMIN4
Input
Red/White dots
42
ALM_IN4
Input
Orange/White dots
43
ALMIN5
Input
Green/White dots
44
ALM_IN5
Input
Blue/White dots
45
ALMIN6
Input
Violet/White dots
46
ALM_IN6
Input
White/Black dots
47
ALMIN7
Input
Yellow/Black dots
48
ALM_IN7
Input
Green/Black dots
49
ALMIN8
Input
Light Blue/Black
dots
50
ALM_IN8
Input
Pink/Black dots
Platform 1
Platform 2
426006-2332-013-A04
A-53
Connection Data
Assignment
Pin
Designation
Function
Direction
Wire color
Platform 3
51
ALMIN9
Input
Red/Black dots
52
ALM_IN9
Input
Orange/Black dots
53
ALMIN10
Input
Violet/Black dots
54
ALM_IN10
Input
Gray/Black dots
55
ALMIN11
Input
56
ALM_IN11
Input
Orange/Red dots
57
ALMIN12
Input
Yellow/Red dots
58
ALM_IN12
Input
Green/Red dots
59
ALMIN13
Input
Violet/Red dots
60
ALM_IN13
Input
Gray/Red dots
61
ALMIN14
Input
White/Red dots
62
ALM_IN14
Input
Pink/Red dots
63
ALMIN15
Input
Yellow/White
64
ALM_IN15
Input
Gray/White
65
ALMIN16
Input
Pink/White
66
ALM_IN16
Input
Brown/Black
67
WARN_NC

normally closed contact
Output
Blue/Black
68
WARN_NO

normally open contact
Output
Gray/White dots
Platform 4
All platforms
A-54

Maintenance Manual
426006-2332-013-A04
B
Rack Installation
In this appendix:
Installing Equipment Racks ............................................................................ B-1
Installing 19" Racks ........................................................................................ B-6
Installing Equipment Racks

NOTE: The instructions in this Appendix are relevant to the
installation of all rack types. However, it is recommended that
BG-20 platforms be installed in ETSI A racks.
Marking Rack Floor

You need to mark out the rack floor plan before installing the rack.
Before you start:
Before starting, find the prescribed location of each equipment rack.
If you have not yet unpacked the rack and the associated mounting kits, do so
now (see Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection (page 3-5)).
426006-2332-013-A04
B-1
Rack Installation

Maintenance Manual
To mark out the rack floor plan:

1. For each rack, mark out the floor at the rack location(s) according to the
floor plan template corresponding to the type of rack being installed:
ETSI A and ETSI B racks: Use template of diagram a. in the figure

"Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden
Floors (page B-3)).
23 rack: Use template of diagram a. in the figure "Mounting diagrams

for 19 and 23 racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors (page B3)).
19 rack: Use template of diagram b. in the figure "Mounting diagrams

for 19 and 23 racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors (page B3)).
The marked locations are a helpful guide for positioning the racks.
2. If the installation is located at a site with a floating (suspended) floor, also
mark out all cable entry slots.
3. For concrete or wooden floors, mark out all the points designated for
equipment bolting.
Installing the Rack on Concrete Floors

To install the rack on a concrete floor:
1. Drill the required mounting holes in accordance with the appropriate
template. See diagram a. in the figure "Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks",
and diagram a. or b. in the figure "Mounting diagrams for 19 and 23
racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors (page B-3)).
2. Insert expansion shields into the holes.
3. Position the rack over the mounting holes.
4. Secure the rack to the floor with the bolts supplied in the mounting kit, in
accordance with diagram b. or diagram c. in the figure "Mounting diagrams
for 19 and 23 racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors (page B-3)).
B-2
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Rack Installation
Installing the Rack on Wooden Floors

To install the rack on a wooden floor:
1. Drill the required mounting holes in accordance with the appropriate
template (see the following figures), using a 5 mm drill bit.
3. Secure the rack to the floor using the appropriate wood screws (see the
following figures).
Figure B-1: Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks
426006-2332-013-A04
B-3
Rack Installation

Maintenance Manual
Figure B-2: Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks
Installing the Rack on Floating (Suspended)

Floors
To install the rack on a floating (suspended) floor:
1. Drill the required mounting holes in the suspended floor, in accordance
with the appropriate template.
3. Secure the rack to the floor in accordance with diagram c. in the figure
"Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors
(page B-3)).
B-4
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Rack Installation
Installing the Rack on Suspended Overhead

Trays
To install the rack on a suspended overhead tray:
1. See the following figure and position the overhead rack securing brackets.
2. Secure the rack to the overhead cabling trays, using the adjustable brackets.
2200 mm high racks may also be attached to the ceiling; 2600 mm racks
are generally attached only to the ceiling.
Figure B-3: Rack mounting diagram for attachment to suspended overhead

tray (2200 mm rack)
Installing Extendable Rails

In high-density installations, it may be necessary to install the xRAP above the
rack using the extendable installation rails available from ECI Telecom.
In this case, attach the extendable installation rails to the top of the rack before
installing the equipment.
Grounding the Rack

Immediately after installing the rack, connect its grounding stud to the
prescribed grounding point on the site grounding bar.
Use a grounding lead that meets the requirements described in Rack Grounding
Requirements (page 2-18).
426006-2332-013-A04
B-5
Rack Installation

Maintenance Manual
Installing 19" Racks

The BG-20 can also be installed in European 19 racks. This is accepted under
the limitations that the racks general dimensions are according to the
following figure. Any other European 19 rack must first be examined and
approved by ECI Telecom.
Figure B-4: Example of an approved European 19 rack
B-6
426006-2332-013-A04
C
License Activation
In this appendix:
BG-20 Licensing Scheme ............................................................................... C-1
Selecting the Proper BG-20 for Each Site ...................................................... C-3
Activating Licenses ........................................................................................ C-4
BG-20 Licensing Scheme

The BG-20B supports ADM-4 and six FE interfaces, thereby accommodating a
real pay-as-you-grow solution based on required services. New services, such
as ADM-4 and FE interfaces, can be implemented where and when required
after appropriate license activation. By using the license-based solution,
carriers can benefit from:
CAPEX savings: pay according to the required functionality and capacity
A future-proof solution: the ability to add functions, capacity, and

interfaces when and where required, just by upgrading licenses
The following are some basic concepts that apply to BG-20 licensing:
The license fee concept is NE-based. This means that the carrier buys the
licenses for a specific NE connected to a specific EMS-BGF, based on a
serial number.
The license is stored in the EMS-BGF or LCT-BGF and is activated in the

NE according to its serial number. This means that the EMS-BGF or
LCT-BGF searches its managed network for the NE with the appropriate
serial number, in order to activate its license.
426006-2332-013-A04
C-1
License Activation

Maintenance Manual
The license policy is enforced both in the EMS-BGF or LCT-BGF, as well

as in the BG-20 NE embedded software.
The BG-20 NE prevents the creation of any Ethernet service through FE

interfaces on the MXC20 or the implementation of STM-4 ADM until the
license is activated. An appropriate license must be purchased by the
customer to be able to use the following features:
BG-20B activation as an ADM-4
First-time activation of or increasing the number of Ethernet ports on

the BG-20B
BG-20B upgrade from ADM-1 to ADM-4
The license key cannot be moved from one NE to another.
The license can only be updated upwards, which means that an ADM-4
cannot be changed to an ADM-1 by issuing a new license. This requires a
special process for deleting an activated license key.
There is no limitation for using a BG-20 with a high-level license key for
lower-level requirements. For example, a BG-20 NE with a license for
ADM-4 and 4 x FE ports can be installed and used as an ADM-1 without
Ethernet services, just by plugging in the appropriate SFPs. Later, the NE
can be upgraded to the appropriate license key level.
License activation is not traffic-affecting.

NOTE: The OMS4B always provides one STM-4 interface,
and no license is needed.
All GbE and FE interfaces on the ESW_2G_8F_E are always
activated. No license is needed to activate these interfaces.
C-2
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
License Activation
Selecting the Proper BG-20 for

Each Site
Because the license is based on the NE serial number and cannot be moved
from one NE to another, during installation, you must select the proper BG-20
unit from your warehouse for each site you want to install. Although all BG-20
units have the same hardware, they may have different NE types, according to
the license purchased for each NE. For example, if you install a BG-20 with an
ADM-4 license in site A that only needs ADM-1 and you later need an ADM-4
license for site B, there may be only one BG-20 with an ADM-1 license in your
warehouse. In this case, you should either move the BG-20 in site A to site B,
or purchase another ADM-4 license for the BG-20 in your warehouse. Each of
these options has a cost. In order to help you identify the BG-20 license type,
each BG-20 shelf has a label on its package showing its license type, based on
the license you purchased for this unit before its delivery. The following figure
shows an example of a license label.
Figure C-1: BG-20 License Label
You can view the NE license type, ADM rate, and number of Ethernet ports on
the license label.
NOTE: The license type shown on an NEs license label is
based on the license purchased for this BG-20 before its
delivery. If you purchase additional licenses after this BG-20
is delivered, the license label on its package box may not be
correct. You must check the license type for each BG-20
using the NE serial number and the latest license list you
received after making your latest license order, in order to
ensure that all licenses are according to the latest order.
426006-2332-013-A04
C-3
License Activation

Maintenance Manual
Activating Licenses
All BG-20Bs are delivered with a default NE type, which is ADM-1 without
any FE interface activated. To upgrade a BG-20 to ADM-4 or to use any
number of FE interfaces on the MXC20, you must activate the appropriate
license for this BG-20, either during installation or any time thereafter when
you want to use these features.
After each license order, you will receive the following license files:
A file on a CD that includes all the license keys, based on NE serial

numbers. The following CD requirements apply:
A single CD is delivered with each order.
The CD can be duplicated for distribution and loading to any number of

EMS-BGFs or LCT-BGFs.
A printed list of the new licenses. This printout aids in identifying the
license type for each BG-20 according to its serial number and can be used
to manually input required licensing information into the LCT-BGF as part
of the license activation process or as part of an installation without a
loaded CD.
A license label on each BG-20 shelf box. You will only receive this
information if you order the license for a BG-20 before its delivery. The
license label can help you identify the license type of each BG-20, and
enable you to manually input licensing information in the LCT-BGF or
during an installation without a loaded CD.
To upgrade BG-20 licenses, you should activate the license for each BG-20
through the EMS-BGF or LCT-BGF. The simplest way is to load each license
CD to all your EMS-BGFs and LCT-BGFs so that they always have the latest
license information for all your BG-20 units.
If you activate NE licenses using the EMS-BGF, the EMS-BGF automatically
searches all the BG-20 units that it manages and activates their licenses
according to the latest license information stored in the EMS-BGF.
If you activate NE licenses using the LCT-BGF, you should perform the
activation operation NE by NE. For each NE, the LCT-BGF finds the necessary
license information in its database and activates the NEs license.
C-4
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
License Activation
If you have not loaded the latest license CD to your EMS-BGF or LCT-BGF,
you can manually input the license type and license key for each BG-20 during
license activation. In this case, locate the license type and license key for the
BG-20 whose license you want to activate using one of the following methods:
From its license label on its packing box. Be sure that this license label
includes the latest license information.
From the latest printed license list, according to its serial number.
From an EMS-BGF on which the latest license CD has been loaded. The
EMS-BGF has a feature that enables you to view the latest license type and
key for each BG-20 unit by serial number.
426006-2332-013-A04
C-5
License Activation
C-6

Maintenance Manual
426006-2332-013-A04
Index
Attaching the Transparent Protection
Cover 4-48
Attaching the Wall-Mounted Frame
4-40
2
2 Mbps Test 5-5
34 Mbps Test 5-5
4
45 Mbps Test 5-5
A
About This Manual xiii
AC power 2-13
AC Power Cable 2-13
AC Power Cables 2-13
AC_CONV_20B
connection data A-2
AC_CONV_20B/AC_CONV_20E AC
Input Power Connectors A-2
AC_CONV_20E
connection data A-2
Activating Licenses C-4
Alarm Cables 2-13
ALARM IN/OUT Connector A-51
Alarm-Handling Test 5-10, 5-14
Alarms
cable 2-13
connection data A-8
Alarms Connector A-8
Assembling the DDF 4-15
Attaching Cable Clamping Bars 4-12
Attaching Connection Blocks 4-16
Attaching the BG-20B Shelf in the Rack
3-32
Attaching the Fiber Guide Tube 4-12,
4-39
Attaching the Support Rails 4-7
426006-2332-013-A04
Before You Start 2-1

BG-20
connecting fibers and cables 3-66
connection data A-1
installation 2-7
integration with other equipment in
one rack 2-9
licensing C-1
maintenance overview 6-1
physical location 2-5
platform options 1-2
platform overview 1-1
power sources 2-6
protection 5-1
routing and connecting electrical
interface cables 3-70
selecting for each site C-3
typical installation 2-8
BG-20 Licensing Scheme C-1
BG-20 Platform Options 1-2
BG-20 Platform Overview 1-1
BG-20B
attaching in rack 3-32
BG-20E installation on 3-37
installation in rack 3-31
power module installation 3-33
shelf grounding 3-33
BG-20B Wall-Mounted Installations 4-1
BG-20E
extension cards installation 3-42
installation in rack 3-37
installation on BG-20B 3-37
I-1
Index

Maintenance Manual
power module installation 3-41

BGW-20E
extension cards installation
(BGW-20E) 3-52
fan module installation 3-51
Installation on BG-20B 3-45
power module installation
(BGW-20E) 3-50
C
Cables
alarm 2-13
connecting 3-66
connecting coaxial 3-73
connecting data interface cables to
Ethernet interfaces 3-74
connecting timing cables 3-78
connecting to AC power source 3-68
DC power 2-11
electric traffic 2-14
grounding 2-11
management 2-13
orderwire 2-14
preparing 2-10
RAP input power 2-11
shelf power 2-12
timing 2-13
z_AC power 2-13
Cards
replacing 6-24
Checking Cards and Modules Installed in
Each Shelf 5-2
Checking DC Voltage Polarity 3-22
Cleaning Optical Connectors 2-7
Commissioning Tests 5-1
Connecting
coaxial cables 3-73
data interface cables to Ethernet
interfaces 3-74
E1cables for balanced E1 interfaces
3-71
E1cables for unbalanced E1 interfaces
3-72
I-2
electrical cables for ICPs 3-74, 3-76

electrical cables for PCM interfaces to
ICPs 3-75
electrical cables for PCM interfaces to
VDF 3-74
electrical interface cables to BG-20
3-70
optical fibers to optical modules
3-69
orderwire cables 3-79
power and alarm cables to AC power
source 3-68
power and alarm cables to DC power
source 3-66
power cables 4-50
power cables (in the cabinet) 4-26
timing cables 3-78
Connecting Alarm Cables 4-28, 4-51
Connecting an Alarm Cable to the BG20B 3-69
Connecting Cabinet Grounding 4-24
Connecting Customer Cables 4-17
Connecting Equipment Cables 4-17
Connecting Fibers and Cables to the
BG-20 Shelf 3-66
Connecting Fibers and Cables to the
BG-20B in Wall-Mounted Cabinet
4-32
Connecting Management Cables 4-31,
4-54
Connecting Optical Fibers 4-28, 4-51
Connecting Optical Fibers to Optical
Modules 3-69
Connecting Orderwire Cables 3-79
Connecting Power Cables 4-26, 4-50
Connecting Power Cables to a DC Power
Source 3-66
Connecting Power Cables to an AC
Power Source 3-68
3-78, 4-31, 4-53
Connecting Wall-Mounted Frame
Grounding 4-48
Connection Data A-1
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
AC_CONV_20B A-2
AC_CONV_20E A-2
alarms A-8
E1 on MXC20 A-14
E1on ME1_21/ME1_42 A-19
ESW_2G_8F_E A-26
Ethernet A-24
ICP_V24 A-40
ICP_V35 A-43
ICP_VF A-39
INF_20B A-2
INF_20E A-2
M345_3 A-24
MNG Ethernet A-3
orderwire A-6
overview A-2
P345_3E A-25
PE1_63 A-25
RS-232 A-5
SM_10E A-26
SM_CODIR_4E A-36
SM_EM_24W6E A-28
SM_FXO_8E A-27
SM_FXS_8E A-27
SM_V24E A-30, A-32
timing A-4
V.11 overhead A-7
Connection Data for SM_CODIR_4E
Interfaces A-36
Connection Data for SM_EM_24W6E
Interfaces A-28
Connection Data for SM_FXO_8E and
SM_FXS_8E Interfaces A-27
Connection Data for SM_OMNI_E
Interfaces A-37
A-32
Connection Data for SM_V35_V11
Interfaces A-35
A-30
426006-2332-013-A04
Index
D
Data Network Commissioning Tests
5-11
DC power cables 2-11
DC Power Cables 2-11
DDF 21 E1s Unit 4-14
Disassembling the BG-20E from the
BG-20B 3-39
Disassembling the BG-20EH from the
BG-20B 3-47
Document Conventions xiv
Document Organization xiii
Dslot Modules
installation 3-34
replacing 6-25
E
E1
connection data on ME1_21/ME1_42
A-19
connection data on MXC20 A-14
E1 Connectors on ME1_21 and ME1_42
A-19
E1 Connectors on MXC20 (L115 Cable)
A-14
E1 Connectors on MXC20 (L91 Cable)
A-9
Electric Traffic Cables 2-14
Electric Traffic Cables 2-14
Environmental Requirements 2-5
Equipment 3-1
Equipment Installation 3-1
Equipment Power-on Test 5-8
Equipment Power-On Test 5-8
Equipment Safety 2-17
ESD
protection against 2-23
Eslot
replacing cards 6-26
ESW_2G_8F_E Card Connection Data
A-26
Ethernet
connection data A-24
I-3
Index

Maintenance Manual
EWS_2G_8F_E
installation 3-43
F
Fast Ethernet Interface Connectors A-24
Fiber Storage Tray
installation 3-22
Fibers
connecting optical fibers to optical
modules 3-69
connecting to BG-20 3-66
optical 2-16
preparing 2-10
Frame Loos-Rate Test 5-13
Frame Loss Rate Test 5-13
G
Grounding Cables 2-11
Grounding Requirements 2-18
rack 2-18
Grounding the BG-20B Shelf 3-33
Grounding the Rack B-5
I
ICP_DB37D Connection Data A-46
ICP_V11_V24 Connection Data A-44
ICP_V24
ICP_V24 Connection Data A-40
ICP_V35
ICP_V35 Connection Data A-43
ICP_VF
ICP_VF Connection Data A-39
ICPs
connecting electrical cables 3-76
connecting electrical cables for PCM
interfaces 3-74
replacing 6-27
Identifying Slots in the BG-20EH 3-49
I-4
INF_20B
connection data A-2
INF_20B/INF_20E DC Input Power
Connectors A-2
INF_20E
connection data A-2
Input Sensitivity test 5-8
Input Sensitivity Test 5-8
Installation
ancillary units in racks 3-8
BG-20 in racks 2-7
BG-20B in rack 3-31
BG-20B in Wall-Mounted cabinet
4-1
BG-20B in Wall-Mounted frame
4-41
BG-20B power modules 3-33
BG-20E in rack 3-37
BG-20E on the BG-20B 3-37
BG-20E power modules 3-41
Dslot modules 3-34
equipment racks B-1
extendable rails B-5
extension cards in BG-20E 3-42
fiber storage tray 3-22
integrating BG-20 and other
equipment in one rack 2-9
ODF 3-24
options 3-6
overview 3-1
plan 2-7
preliminary preparations 3-2
racks B-1
racks on concrete floors B-2
racks on floating floors B-4
racks on wooden floors B-3
rail stiffeners 3-31
RAP-4B 3-15
RAP-BG 3-9
sequence 3-2
SM_10E ICPs 3-29
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
traffic modules in SM_10E 3-44

typical 2-8
unpacking and visual inspection 3-5
xDDF-21 patch panel 3-27
z_19 B-6
Installation of BG-20 in Racks 2-7
Installation Options 3-6
Installation Plan 2-7
Installation Sequence 3-2
Installing 19 B-6
Installing a single BG-20C in a 19 3-56
Installing a single BG-20C in a 23 3-58
Installing a single BG-20C in an ETSI
Rack 3-54
Installing an FCU_20EH in the BG-20EH
3-51
Installing Ancillary Units in Racks 3-8
Installing Cable Guides 4-11
Installing Cable Supports 4-38
Installing Cabling Accessories 4-10
Installing Clip Nuts for the BG and DDFs
4-19
Installing Clip Nuts for the BG, DDFs,
and AC CONV Unit 4-22
Installing DDFs 4-23
Installing Dslot Modules 3-34
Installing Equipment Racks B-1
Installing Extendable Rails B-5
Installing Extension Cards in the BG-20E
3-42
Installing Extension Cards in the BG20EH 3-52
Installing Grounding Cables 4-13
Installing Mounting Brackets 4-15
Installing Power Modules in the BG-20B
3-33
Installing Power Modules in the BG-20E
3-41
Installing Power Modules in the BG20EH 3-50
Installing SFP Modules 3-35
426006-2332-013-A04
Index
Installing SFP Modules in the

ESW_2G_8F_E, MPS_2G_8F, or
S1_4 Cards 3-43
Installing SM_10E ICPs 3-29
Installing the 19 4-8
Installing the AC CONV Unit 4-23
Installing the AC_CONV_UNIT 3-30
Installing the BG-20B and a DDF (Option
5) 4-45
Installing the BG-20B and Accessories in
the Wall-Mounted Frame 4-41
4-18
(Option 1) 4-42
Installing the BG-20B in a Wall-Mounted
Cabinet 4-3
Installing the BG-20B Platform 4-20,
4-23
Installing the BG-20B Shelf in the Rack
3-31
Installing the BG-20B, a DDF, and a
RAP-BG (Option 2) 4-43
Installing the BG-20B, a DDF, and an
AC/DC CONV (Option 4) 4-44
Installing the BG-20B, Two DDFs, and
an AC CONV Unit 4-21
Installing the BG-20C Shelf in Racks
3-53
Installing the BG-20E on the BG-20B
3-37
Installing the BG-20E Shelf in the Rack
3-37
Installing the BG-20EH on the BG-20B
3-45
Installing the BG-20EH Platform in the
Rack 3-45
Installing the Cover Holders 4-47
Installing the C-Rail 4-9
Installing the DDFs 4-20
Installing the Front Door 4-36
Installing the FST 3-22
I-5
Index

Maintenance Manual
Installing the ICP_MCP30 3-27

Installing the Interior Components 4-4
Installing the ODF 3-24
Installing the Rack on Concrete Floors
B-2
Installing the Rack on Floating
(Suspended) Floors B-4
Installing the Rack on Suspended
Overhead Trays B-5
Installing the Rack on Wooden Floors
B-3
Installing the Rail Stiffeners 3-31
Installing the RAP-4B 3-15, 3-17
Installing the RAP-BG 3-9, 3-10
Installing the Rear Panel 4-6
Installing the Side Covers 4-35
Installing the Top and Bottom Covers
4-33
Installing the Wall-Mounted Cabinet
Covers and Door 4-33
Installing the Wall-Mounted Frame 4-37
Installing the Wall-Mounted Frame Front
Cover 4-46
Installing the xDDF-21 Patch Panel
3-27
Installing Traffic Modules in the SM_10E
3-44
Installing Two BG-20C Units in a 23
3-62
Installing Two BG-20C Units in an ETSI
Rack 3-60
Integrating BG-20 Shelves and Other
Equipment in One Rack 2-9
Intended Audience xiii
Introduction 1-1
L
Laser
classification 2-20
information 2-21
operating precautions 2-21
safety requirements 2-20
I-6
safety warning 2-20

warning labels 2-20
Laser Classification 2-20
Laser Device Operating Precautions
2-21
Laser Information 2-21
Laser Safety Requirements 2-20
Laser Safety Statutory Warning 2-20
License Activation C-1
Licenses
activation C-1, C-4
selecting proper BG-20 for a site
C-3
Loos of Signal Detection Test 5-7
Loss of Signal (LOS) Detection Test 5-7
M
M345_3
M345_3 Card Connection Data A-24
Maintenance 6-1
preventive 6-2
Maintenance Action Test 5-11
Maintenance Action Tests 5-11
Management Cables 2-13
Marking Rack Floor B-1
Measuring Optical Levels 5-4
MGE_1_L1 Card Connection Data
A-24
MNG
connection data A-3
MNG Ethernet Connector A-3
Modules
replacing 6-24
MPS_2G_8F Card Connection Data
A-26
N
Network Timing Synchronization Test
5-7
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
O
Obtaining Technical Documentation xv
ODF
installation 3-24
Onsite Troubleshooting 6-3
Optical Fibers 2-16
Optical Fibers 2-16
Optical Fibers
connecting 3-69
Orderwire 2-14
cables 2-14
connecting cables 3-79
connection data A-6
Orderwire Cables 2-14
Orderwire Connector A-6
Outline of the Installation Procedure 2-2
Overview xiii, 2-1, 3-1, 4-1, 6-1, A-2
P
P345_3E
P345_3E Card Connection Data A-25
Path Protection and Nonretrieval Test
5-9
PE1_63
PE1_63 Card Connection Data A-25
Personnel Training 2-24
Physical Location 2-5
Physical Location of BG-20 2-5
Platform Options 1-2
Platform Overview 1-1
Platform Power-On Test Procedure 5-5
Power Cables
AC 2-13
DC 2-11
shelf 2-12
Power Modules
replacing 6-27
Power Sources 2-6
Power Supply Requirements 2-19
Preliminary Preparations 3-2
426006-2332-013-A04
Index
Preparing Cables and Fibers 2-10

Preparing DC Input Power Cables 3-9,
3-16
Preparing Installation Holes 4-40
Preparing the Rear Panel Holes 4-5
Preventive Maintenance 6-2
Protection Against Electrostatic
Discharge 2-23
R
Rack Grounding Requirements 2-18
Rack Installation B-1
Racks
floor marking B-1
grounding B-5
installation B-1
installation on concrete floors B-2
installation on floating floors B-4
installation on suspended overhead
tray B-5
installation on wooden floors B-3
Z_19 B-6
Rail Stiffeners
installation 3-31
RAP
input power cables 2-11
RAP Input Power Cables 2-11
RAP-4B Connectors A-50
RAP-BG
installation 3-9
Related Documentation xv
Replacing
cards and modules 6-24
Dslot modules 6-25
Eslot cards 6-26
ICPs 6-27
power modules 6-27
traffic modules on SM_10E 6-26
Replacing Cards and Modules 6-24
Replacing Dslot Modules 6-25
Replacing Eslot Cards 6-26
Replacing ICPs for the SM_10E 6-27
I-7
Index

Maintenance Manual
Replacing Power Modules 6-27

Replacing SFP/XFP Transceivers 6-28
Replacing Traffic Modules on the
SM_10E 6-26
Routing
cables and fibers in the cabinet 4-24
electrical interface cables to BG-20
3-70
Routing and Connecting Cables and
Fibers in the Cabinet 4-24
Routing and Connecting Cables and
Fibers in the Frame 4-49
3-73, 4-30, 4-53
Routing and Connecting Data Interface
Cables to Ethernet Interfaces 3-74
Balanced E1 Interfaces 3-71
Unbalanced E1 Interfaces 3-72
Routing and Connecting Electrical Cables
for ICPs 3-76
for PCM Interfaces 3-74
for PCM Interfaces to ICPs 3-75
for PCM Interfaces to the VDF 3-74
Routing and Connecting Electrical
Interface Cables to the BG-20 3-70
Cables 4-29, 4-52
RS-232
connection data A-5
RS-232 Connector A-5
S
S1_4
installation 3-43
Safety 2-17, 6-24
laser 2-20
Safety and Workmanship 6-24
I-8
SDH Commissioning Tests 5-5

Selecting the Proper BG-20 for Each Site
C-3
Severity Assignment Test 5-10
SFP Modules
installation 3-35
installation in ESW_2G_8F_E 3-43
installation in S1_4 3-43
SHELF ALARM Connectors A-50
Shelf Power Cables 2-12
Shelf Power-on Test 5-5
Site Commissioning Tests 5-2
Site Preparation 2-5
SM_10E
ICP installation 3-29
replacing ICPs 6-27
replacing traffic modules 6-26
traffic modules installation 3-44
SM_10E Card Connection Data A-26
SM_CODIR_4E
SM_EM_24W6E
SM_FXO_8E
SM_FXS_8E
SM_V24E
SM_V35E
Stability Test 5-9, 5-14
System Recovery and Reset Tests 5-13
T
T3/T4 Timing Connector A-4
Technical Assistance xvi
Temporary EPA 2-24
work arrangements 2-25
426006-2332-013-A04

Maintenance Manual
Test Equipment 5-1

Test Equipment Setup 5-5
Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials
6-1
Tests
alarm handling 5-10
commissioning 5-1
data network commissioning 5-11
equipment 2-7, 5-1
equipment power-on 5-8
equipment setup 5-5
Throughput and Latency Tests 5-12
Timing
cables 2-13
connecting cables 3-78
connection data A-5
Timing (clock ) Cables 2-13
Timing (Clock) Cables 2-13
Tools and Test Equipment 2-7
Traffic Stability Test 5-9
Transmission Alarm-Handling Test 5-10
Troubleshooting Power Problems 6-4
Troubleshooting Using Component
Indicators 6-5
Typical BG-20 Installation 2-8
426006-2332-013-A04
Index
U
Unpacking and Performing Visual
Inspection 3-5
Unpacking and Visual Inspection 3-5
Use of a Temporary EPA 2-24
V
V.11 Overhead
connection data A-7
V.11 Overhead Connector A-7
Visual Inspection 5-3
Visual Inspection and Mechanical Checks
5-3
W
Wall-Mounted Cabinet 4-2
Wall-Mounted Frame 4-37
Warning Labels for Laser Products 2-20
Wiring the E1 Cables to the DDF 4-17
Work and Equipment Safety 2-17
Work Arrangements within a Temporary
EPA 2-25
X
xDDF-21
installation 3-27
I-9
Index
I-10

Maintenance Manual
426006-2332-013-A04

Broadgate Bg-20 Iomm A05 v14 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Broadgate Bg-20 Iomm A05 v14 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BroadGate BG-20

Installation, Operation, and

BG-20 Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual

Copyright by ECI Telecom, 2002-2012. All rights reserved worldwide.

Before You Start ...................................................................... 2-1

Equipment Installation ............................................................ 3-1

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

BG-20 Installation, Operation, and

BG-20B Wall-Mounted Installations ....................................... 4-1

Commissioning Tests ............................................................. 5-1

Maintenance ............................................................................. 6-1

Connection Data ..................................................................... A-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... A-2

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

BG-20 Installation, Operation, and

E1 Connectors on MXC20 (L115 Cable) ........................................................ A-14

Rack Installation ..................................................................... B-1

Installing Equipment Racks .............................................................................. B-1

License Activation .................................................................. C-1

BG-20 Licensing Scheme................................................................................. C-1

Index .......................................................................................... I-1

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

BG-20 Installation, Operation, and

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

BG-20 Installation, Operation, and

Figure 3-32: Inserting the thin flat-head tool ................................................................ 3-40

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

BG-20 Installation, Operation, and

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

BG-20 Installation, Operation, and

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

BG-20B modules ................................................................................... 1-3

BG-20E modules ................................................................................... 1-4

SM_10E traffic modules ........................................................................ 1-5

Typical BG-20 equipment installation sequence ................................... 2-2

Environmental requirements ................................................................. 2-5

Equipment dimensions .......................................................................... 2-6

Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools ....................................... 2-7

Traffic cables mating connector data .................................................. 2-14

Optical fibers and mating connector data ............................................ 2-16

BG-20 -DC circuit breaker data ........................................................... 2-19

BG-20C -DC circuit breaker data ........................................................ 2-19

LC transceivers laser information STM-4 SFP .................................... 2-21

LC transceivers laser information STM-1/100BaseFX SFP ................ 2-22

LC transceivers laser information GbE SFP (OTGBE) ....................... 2-22

Outline of typical BG-20B equipment installation sequence ................. 3-4

BG-20EH modules............................................................................... 3-49

Card and module inventory ................................................................... 5-2

Visual inspection and mechanical checks ............................................. 5-3

Measured optical levels ......................................................................... 5-4

2 Mbps tests .......................................................................................... 5-5

34 Mbps tests ........................................................................................ 5-6

45 Mbps tests ........................................................................................ 5-6

SDH tests .............................................................................................. 5-6

Traffic stability test time intervals .......................................................... 5-9

Throughput and latency test results .................................................... 5-12

Frame loss rate test results ................................................................. 5-13

Preventive maintenance inspection and checks ................................... 6-2

Troubleshooting power problems .......................................................... 6-4

General troubleshooting procedures for BG-20B/BG-20C power-on .... 6-5

General troubleshooting procedures for MXC20 ................................... 6-9

General troubleshooting procedures for optical transceiver plug-ins .. 6-11